[go: up one dir, main page]

US20090286767A1 - Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues - Google Patents

Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20090286767A1
US20090286767A1 US12/368,302 US36830209A US2009286767A1 US 20090286767 A1 US20090286767 A1 US 20090286767A1 US 36830209 A US36830209 A US 36830209A US 2009286767 A1 US2009286767 A1 US 2009286767A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
substituted
trifluoromethyl
pyridin
substituents independently
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US12/368,302
Inventor
Rajagopal Bakthavatchalam
Timothy M. Caldwell
Bertrand L. Chenard
Stéphane De Lombaert
Kevin J. Hodgetts
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Neurogen Corp
Original Assignee
Neurogen Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Neurogen Corp filed Critical Neurogen Corp
Priority to US12/368,302 priority Critical patent/US20090286767A1/en
Publication of US20090286767A1 publication Critical patent/US20090286767A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/02—Stomatological preparations, e.g. drugs for caries, aphtae, periodontitis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/14—Antitussive agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/10—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the bladder
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/02—Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/04—Antipruritics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/06—Antimigraine agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P39/00—General protective or antinoxious agents
    • A61P39/02—Antidotes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/12—Antidiuretics, e.g. drugs for diabetes insipidus
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D215/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems
    • C07D215/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D215/16—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D215/38—Nitrogen atoms
    • C07D215/42—Nitrogen atoms attached in position 4
    • C07D215/44—Nitrogen atoms attached in position 4 with aryl radicals attached to said nitrogen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D491/14—Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • This invention relates generally to substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues that have useful pharmacological properties.
  • the invention further relates to the use of such compounds for treating conditions related to capsaicin receptor activation, for identifying other agents that bind to capsaicin receptor, and as probes for the detection and localization of capsaicin receptors.
  • nociceptors A wide variety of physical and chemical stimuli induce activation of such neurons in mammals, leading to recognition of a potentially harmful stimulus. Inappropriate or excessive activation of nociceptors, however, can result in debilitating acute or chronic pain.
  • Neuropathic pain involves pain signal transmission in the absence of stimulus, and typically results from damage to the nervous system. In most instances, such pain is thought to occur because of sensitization in the peripheral and central nervous systems following initial damage to the peripheral system (e.g., via direct injury or systemic disease). Neuropathic pain is typically burning, shooting and unrelenting in its intensity and can sometimes be more debilitating that the initial injury or disease process that induced it.
  • neuropathic pain is frequently non-responsive or only partially responsive to conventional opioid analgesic regimens.
  • Treatments employing the N-methyl-D-aspartate antagonist ketamine or the alpha(2)-adrenergic agonist clonidine can reduce acute or chronic pain, and permit a reduction in opioid consumption, but these agents are often poorly tolerated due to side effects.
  • Topical treatment with capsaicin has been used to treat chronic and acute pain, including neuropathic pain.
  • Capsaicin is a pungent substance derived from the plants of the Solanaceae family (which includes hot chili peppers) and appears to act selectively on the small diameter afferent nerve fibers (A-delta and C fibers) that are believed to mediate pain.
  • the response to capsaicin is characterized by persistent activation of nociceptors in peripheral tissues, followed by eventual desensitization of peripheral nociceptors to one or more stimuli. From studies in animals, capsaicin appears to trigger C fiber membrane depolarization by opening cation selective channels for calcium and sodium.
  • Rat and human vanilloid receptors have been cloned from dorsal root ganglion cells.
  • the first type of vanilloid receptor to be identified is known as vanilloid receptor type 1 (VR1), and the terms “VR1” and “capsaicin receptor” are used interchangeably herein to refer to rat and/or human receptors of this type, as well as mammalian homologues.
  • VR1 vanilloid receptor type 1
  • Capsaicin receptor are used interchangeably herein to refer to rat and/or human receptors of this type, as well as mammalian homologues.
  • the role of VR1 in pain sensation has been confirmed using mice lacking this receptor, which exhibit no vanilloid-evoked pain behavior, and impaired responses to heat and inflammation.
  • VR1 is a nonselective cation channel with a threshold for opening that is lowered in response to elevated temperatures, low pH, and capsaicin receptor agonists.
  • the channel usually opens at temperatures higher than about 45° C. Opening of the capsaicin receptor channel is generally followed by the release of inflammatory peptides from neurons expressing the receptor and other nearby neurons, increasing the pain response. After initial activation by capsaicin, the capsaicin receptor undergoes a rapid desensitization via phosphorylation by cAMP-dependent protein kinase.
  • VR1 agonist vanilloid compounds Because of their ability to desensitize nociceptors in peripheral tissues, VR1 agonist vanilloid compounds have been used as topical anesthetics. However, agonist application may itself cause burning pain, which limits this therapeutic use. Recently, it has been reported that VR1 antagonists, including nonvanilloid compounds, are also useful for the treatment of pain (see PCT International Application Publication Number WO 02/08221, which published Jan. 31, 2002).
  • compounds that interact with VR1, but do not elicit the initial painful sensation of VR1 agonist vanilloid compounds are desirable for the treatment of chronic and acute pain, including neuropathic pain.
  • Antagonists of this receptor are particularly desirable for the treatment of pain, as well as conditions such as tear gas exposure, itch and urinary tract conditions such as urinary incontinence and overactive bladder.
  • the present invention fulfills this need, and provides further related advantages.
  • the present invention provides substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues characterized by the formula:
  • compounds of Formula I are VR1 modulators and exhibit a K i of no greater than 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar in a capsaicin receptor binding assay and/or have an EC 50 or IC 50 value of no greater than 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar in an assay for determination of capsaicin receptor agonist or antagonist activity.
  • VR1 modulators as described herein are VR1 antagonists and exhibit no detectable agonist activity in an in vitro assay of capsaicin receptor activation.
  • compounds as described herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
  • a detectable marker e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated
  • the present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound as described herein (i.e., a compound as provided herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof) in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound as described herein (i.e., a compound as provided herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof) in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • methods for reducing calcium conductance of a cellular capsaicin receptor, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., neuronal) expressing a capsaicin receptor with a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein. Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro.
  • a cell e.g., neuronal
  • a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to a capsaicin receptor.
  • the inhibition takes place in vitro.
  • Such methods comprise contacting a capsaicin receptor with at least one VR1 modulator as described herein, under conditions and in an amount sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to the capsaicin receptor.
  • the capsaicin receptor is in a patient.
  • Such methods comprise contacting cells expressing a capsaicin receptor in a patient with at least one VR1 modulator as described herein in an amount sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to cells expressing a cloned capsaicin receptor in vitro, and thereby inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to the capsaicin receptor in the patient.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein.
  • methods for treating pain in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from pain a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for treating itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, cough and/or hiccup in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from one or more of the foregoing conditions a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein.
  • the present invention further provides methods for promoting weight loss in an obese patient, comprising administering to an obese patient a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for identifying an agent that binds to capsaicin receptor, comprising: (a) contacting capsaicin receptor with a labeled VR1 modulator as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the VR1 modulator to capsaicin receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled VR1 modulator; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled VR1 modulator in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled VR1 modulator with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled VR1 modulator in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b), and therefrom identifying an agent that binds to capsaicin receptor.
  • the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of capsaicin receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a VR1 modulator as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the VR1 modulator to capsaicin receptor; and (b) detecting a level of the VR1 modulator bound to capsaicin receptor.
  • the present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation, such as pain, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, cough, hiccup and/or obesity.
  • the present invention provides methods of preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
  • the present invention provides substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues.
  • Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, to modulate (preferably inhibit) capsaicin receptor activity in a variety of contexts.
  • quinolin-4-ylamine analogue encompasses all compounds of Formula I as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such compounds.
  • Such compounds include analogues in which the quinoline core is modified by the addition of ring nitrogen atoms, as well as analogues in which varied substituents, as described in more detail below, are attached to such a core structure.
  • compounds that are quinolin-4-ylamines, [1,8]naphthyridin-4-ylamines, [1,5]naphthyridin-4-ylamines and pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-ylamines are within the scope of quinolin-4-ylamine analogues.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is generally considered in the art to be suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication.
  • Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids.
  • Specific pharmaceutical salts include, but are not limited to, salts of acids such as hydrochloric, phosphoric, hydrobromic, malic, glycolic, fumaric, sulfuric, sulfamic, sulfanilic, formic, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, benzene sulfonic, ethane disulfonic, 2-hydroxyethylsulfonic, nitric, benzoic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, citric, tartaric, lactic, stearic, salicylic, glutamic, ascorbic, pamoic, succinic, fumaric, maleic, propionic, hydroxymaleic, hydroiodic, phenylacetic, alkanoic such as acetic, HOOC—(CH 2 ) n —COOH where n is 0-4, and the like.
  • acids such as hydrochloric, phosphoric, hydrobromic, malic, glycolic, fumaric, sulfuric
  • pharmaceutically acceptable cations include, but are not limited to sodium, potassium, calcium, aluminum, lithium and ammonium.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts for the compounds provided herein, including those listed by Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., p. 1418 (1985).
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method.
  • such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
  • nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile
  • each compound of Formula I may, but need not, be formulated as a hydrate, solvate or non-covalent complex.
  • the various crystal forms and polymorphs are within the scope of the present invention.
  • prodrugs of the compounds of Formula I are also provided herein.
  • a “prodrug” is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound of Formula I, or other formula provided herein.
  • a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein.
  • Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively.
  • Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved to the parent compounds.
  • alkyl refers to a straight or branched chain or cyclic saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon.
  • Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (C 1 -C 8 alkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (C 1 -C 6 alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl, 3-methylpentyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl and norbornyl.
  • C 0 -C 4 alkyl refers to a single covalent bond (C 0 ) or an alkyl group having 1, 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms; “C 0 -C 6 alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group; “C 0 -C 8 alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 8 alkyl group.
  • preferred alkyl groups are straight or branched chain. In some instances herein, a substituent of an alkyl group is specifically indicated.
  • C 1 -C 6 Cyanoalkyl refers to a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group that has at least one CN substituent.
  • One representative branched cyanoalkyl group is —C(CH 3 ) 2 CN.
  • C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl refers to a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group that has at least one —OH substituent.
  • alkenyl refers to straight or branched chain or cyclic alkene groups, in which at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond is present.
  • Alkenyl groups include C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl and C 2 -C 4 alkenyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl.
  • Alkynyl refers to straight or branched chain or cyclic alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond.
  • Alkynyl groups include C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl and C 2 -C 4 alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • preferred alkenyl and alkynyl groups are straight or branched chain.
  • alkoxy is meant an alkyl group as described above attached via an oxygen bridge.
  • Alkoxy groups include C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and C 1 -C 4 alkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3-methylpentoxy are specific alkoxy groups.
  • alkylthio refers to an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge.
  • Preferred alkoxy and alkylthio groups are those in which an alkyl group is attached via the heteroatom bridge.
  • oxo refers to a keto (C ⁇ O) group.
  • An oxo group that is a substituent of a nonaromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of —CH 2 — to —C( ⁇ O)—.
  • alkanoyl refers to an acyl group in a linear or branched arrangement (e.g., —(C ⁇ O)-alkyl), where attachment is through the carbon of the keto group.
  • Alkanoyl groups include C 2 -C 8 alkanoyl, C 2 -C 6 alkanoyl and C 2 -C 4 alkanoyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • C 1 alkanoyl refers to —(C ⁇ O)—H, which (along with C 2 -C 8 alkanoyl) is encompassed by the term “C 1 -C 8 alkanoyl.”
  • Ethanoyl is C 2 alkanoyl.
  • alkanone is a ketone group in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement.
  • C 3 -C 8 alkanone refers to an alkanone having from 3 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • a C 3 alkanone group has the structure —CH 2 —(C ⁇ O)—CH 3 .
  • alkyl ether refers to a linear or branched ether substituent.
  • Alkyl ether groups include C 2 -C 8 alkyl ether, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether and C 2 -C 4 alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • a C 2 alkyl ether group has the structure —CH 2 —O—CH 3 .
  • alkoxycarbonyl refers to an alkoxy group linked via a carbonyl (i.e., a group having the general structure —C( ⁇ O)—O-alkyl).
  • Alkoxycarbonyl groups include C 2 -C 8 , C 2 -C 6 and C 2 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • C 1 alkoxycarbonyl refers to —C( ⁇ O)—OH, which is encompassed by the term “C 1 -C 8 alkoxycarbonyl.”
  • Methodoxycarbonyl refers to C( ⁇ O)—OCH 3 .
  • Alkanoyloxy refers to an alkanoyl group linked via an oxygen bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure —O—C( ⁇ O)-alkyl).
  • Alkanoyloxy groups include C 2 -C 8 , C 2 -C 6 and C 2 -C 4 alkanoyloxy groups, which have from 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Alkylsulfonyl refers to groups of the formula —(SO 2 )-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl and C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methylsulfonyl is one representative alkylsulfonyl group.
  • Alkylamino refers to a secondary or tertiary amine having the general structure —NH-alkyl or —N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each alkyl may be the same or different.
  • groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)amino groups, in which each alkyl may be the same or different and may contain from 1 to 8 carbon atoms, as well as mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino groups and mono- and di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)amino groups.
  • Alkylaminoalkyl refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkyl group (i.e., a group having the general structure -alkyl-NH-alkyl or -alkyl-N(alkyl)(alkyl)) in which each alkyl is selected independently.
  • alkyl group i.e., a group having the general structure -alkyl-NH-alkyl or -alkyl-N(alkyl)(alkyl)
  • alkyl is selected independently.
  • Such groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)aminoC 1 -C 8 alkyl, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 1 -C 6 alkyl and mono- and di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)aminoC 1 -C 4 alkyl, in which each alkyl may be the same or different.
  • “Mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 6 alkyl” refers to a mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino group linked via a direct bond or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group.
  • aminocarbonyl refers to an amide group (i.e., —(C ⁇ O)NH 2 ).
  • “Mono- or di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)aminocarbonyl” is an aminocarbonyl group in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms is replaced with C 1 -C 8 alkyl. If both hydrogen atoms are so replaced, the C 1 -C 8 alkyl groups may be the same or different.
  • halogen refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • haloalkyl is a branched, straight-chain or cyclic alkyl group, substituted with 1 or more halogen atoms (e.g., “C 1 -C 8 haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 8 carbon atoms; “C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms).
  • haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-1-trifluoromethyl-ethyl.
  • Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl.
  • haloalkoxy refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above attached via an oxygen bridge.
  • C 1 -C 8 haloalkoxy groups have from 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • Haloalkylsulfonyl refers to a haloalkyl group attached via a —SO 2 — bridge.
  • C 1 -C 6 haloalkylsulfonyl groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • a dash (“-”) that is not between two letters or symbols is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent. For example, —CONH 2 is attached through the carbon atom.
  • a “heteroatom,” as used herein, is oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen.
  • a “carbocycle” or “carbocyclic group” comprises at least one ring formed entirely by carbon-carbon bonds (referred to herein as a carbocyclic ring), and does not contain a heterocyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, each carbocyclic ring within a carbocycle may be saturated, partially saturated or aromatic.
  • a carbocycle generally has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings; carbocycles within certain embodiments have one ring or two fused rings. Typically, each ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members (i.e., C 3 -C 8 ); C 5 -C 7 rings are recited in certain embodiments.
  • Carbocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members.
  • Certain representative carbocycles are cycloalkyl (i.e., groups that comprise saturated and/or partially saturated rings, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, decahydro-naphthalenyl, octahydro-indenyl, and partially saturated variants of any of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl).
  • cycloalkyl i.e., groups that comprise saturated and/or partially saturated rings, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, decahydro-naphthalenyl
  • carbocycles are aryl (i.e., contain at least one aromatic carbocyclic ring, with or without additional fused, pendant or spiro cyclolkyl rings).
  • Such carbocycles include, for example, phenyl, naphthyl, fluorenyl, indanyl and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-naphthyl.
  • C 6 -C 10 arylC 0 -C 8 alkyl groups i.e., groups in which a carbocyclic group comprising at least one aromatic ring is linked via a direct bond or a C 1 -C 8 alkyl group.
  • groups include, for example, phenyl and indanyl, as well as groups in which either of the foregoing is linked via C 1 -C 8 alkyl, preferably via C 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • Phenyl groups linked via a direct bond or alkyl group may be designated phenylC 0 -C 8 alkyl (e.g., benzyl, 1-phenyl-ethyl, 1-phenyl-propyl and 2-phenyl-ethyl).
  • a phenylC 0 -C 8 alkoxy group is a phenyl ring linked via an oxygen bridge or an alkoxy group having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (e.g., phenoxy or benzoxy).
  • a “heterocycle” or “heterocyclic group” has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon).
  • a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring.
  • Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members.
  • heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO 2 .
  • Heterocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated.
  • a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated) or a heteroaryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic).
  • a heterocyclic group may generally be linked via any ring or substituent atom, provided that a stable compound results.
  • N-linked heterocyclic groups are linked via a component nitrogen atom.
  • Heterocyclic groups include, for example, azepanyl, azocinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiofuranyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benztetrazolyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, cinnolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, dihydrofuro[2,3-b]tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydroisoquinolinyl, dihydrotetrahydrofuranyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]decyl, dithiazinyl, furanyl, furazanyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolyl, indazolyl, indolenyl, indolinyl, ind
  • Certain heterocyclic groups are 4- to 10-membered, 5- to 10-membered, 3- to 7-membered, 4- to 7-membered or 5- to 7-membered groups that contain 1 heterocyclic ring or 2 fused or spiro rings, optionally substituted.
  • 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl groups include, for example, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, azepanyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, morpholino, thiomorpholino and 1,1-dioxo-thiomorpholin-4-yl. Such groups may be substituted as indicated.
  • aromatic heterocycles are azocinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl and 3,4-dihydro-1H-isoquinolin-2-yl.
  • C 3 -C 10 )heterocycloalkyls include, for example, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, azepanyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, morpholino, thiomorpholino, and 1,1-dioxo-thiomorpholin-4-yl, as well as groups in which each of the foregoing is substituted.
  • Representative aromatic heterocycles are azocinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl and 3,4-dihydro-1H-isoquinolin-2-yl.
  • Additional heterocyclic groups include, for example, acridinyl, azepanyl, azocinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzotriazolylcarbazolyl, benztetrazolyl, NH-carbazolyl, carbolinyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, cinnolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, dihydrofuro[2,3-b]tetrahydrofuran, dihydroisoquinolinyl, dihydrotetrahydrofuranyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, dithiazinyl, furanyl, furazanyl, imida
  • a “heterocycleC 0 -C 8 alkyl” is a heterocyclic group linked via a single covalent bond or C 1 -C 8 alkyl group.
  • a (3- to 10-membered heterocycle)C 0 -C 6 alkyl is a heterocyclic group having from 3 to 10 ring members linked via a direct bond or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group.
  • a (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)C 0 -C 8 alkyl is a 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 8 alkyl group;
  • a (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl is a 4-to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 4 alkyl group.
  • a “substituent,” as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest.
  • a “ring substituent” may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group discussed herein that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member.
  • substitution refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent as described above, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
  • Groups that are “optionally substituted” are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different).
  • Such optional substituents include, for example, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, nitro, C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, C 1 -C 8 alkoxy, C 2 -C 8 alkyl ether, C 3 -C 8 alkanone, C 1 -C 8 alkylthio, amino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 8 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 8 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 8 alkanoyl, C 2 -C 8 alkanoyloxy, C 1 -C 8 alkoxycarbonyl,
  • VR1 and “capsaicin receptor” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a type 1 vanilloid receptor. Unless otherwise specified, these terms encompass both rat and human VR1 receptors (e.g., GenBank Accession Numbers AF327067, AJ277028 and NM — 018727; sequences of certain human VR1 cDNAs are provided in SEQ ID NOs:1-3, and the encoded amino acid sequences shown in SEQ ID NOs:4 and 5, of U.S. Pat. No. 6,482,611), as well as homologues thereof found in other species.
  • GenBank Accession Numbers AF327067, AJ277028 and NM — 018727 sequences of certain human VR1 cDNAs are provided in SEQ ID NOs:1-3, and the encoded amino acid sequences shown in SEQ ID NOs:4 and 5, of U.S. Pat. No. 6,482,611
  • a “VR1 modulator,” also referred to herein as a “modulator,” is a compound that modulates VR1 activation and/or VR1-mediated signal transduction.
  • VR1 modulators specifically provided herein are compounds of Formula I and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds of Formula I.
  • a VR1 modulator may be a VR1 agonist or antagonist.
  • a modulator binds with “high affinity” if the K i at VR1 is less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar.
  • a representative assay for determining K i at VR1 is provided in Example 5, herein.
  • a modulator is considered an “antagonist” if it detectably inhibits vanilloid ligand binding to VR1 and/or VR1-mediated signal transduction (using, for example, the representative assay provided in Example 6); in general, such an antagonist inhibits VR1 activation with a IC 50 value of less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 100 nanomolar, and more preferably less than 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 6.
  • VR1 antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists.
  • capsaicin receptor antagonists provided herein are not vanilloids.
  • An “inverse agonist” of VR1 is a compound that reduces the activity of VR1 below its basal activity level in the absence of added vanilloid ligand. Inverse agonists of VR1 may also inhibit the activity of vanilloid ligand at VR1, and/or may also inhibit binding of vanilloid ligand to VR1.
  • the ability of a compound to inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand to VR1 may be measured by a binding assay, such as the binding assay given in Example 5.
  • the basal activity of VR1, as well as the reduction in VR1 activity due to the presence of VR1 antagonist may be determined from a calcium mobilization assay, such as the assay of Example 6.
  • a “neutral antagonist” of VR1 is a compound that inhibits the activity of vanilloid ligand at VR1, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a calcium mobilization assay as described in Example 6 performed in the absence of vanilloid ligand, VR1 activity is reduced by no more than 10%, more preferably by no more than 5%, and even more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity).
  • Neutral antagonists of VR1 may inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand to VR1.
  • a “capsaicin receptor agonist” or “VR1 agonist” is a compound that elevates the activity of the receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor (i.e., enhances VR1 activation and/or VR1-mediated signal transduction). Capsaicin receptor agonist activity may be identified using the representative assay provided in Example 6. In general, such an agonist has an EC 50 value of less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 100 nanomolar, and more preferably less than 10 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 6. In certain embodiments, capsaicin receptor agonists provided herein are not vanilloids.
  • a “vanilloid” is capsaicin or any capsaicin analogue that comprises a phenyl ring with two oxygen atoms bound to adjacent ring carbon atoms (one of which carbon atom is located para to the point of attachment of a third moiety that is bound to the phenyl ring).
  • a vanilloid is a “vanilloid ligand” if it binds to VR1 with a K i (determined as described herein) that is no greater than 10 ⁇ M.
  • Vanilloid ligand agonists include capsaicin, olvanil, N-arachidonoyl-dopamine and resiniferatoxin (RTX).
  • Vanilloid ligand antagonists include capsazepine and iodo-resiniferatoxin.
  • a “capsaicin receptor modulatory amount” is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, achieves a concentration of VR1 modulator at a capsaicin receptor within the patient that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to VR1 in vitro (using the assay provided in Example 5) and/or VR1-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 6).
  • the capsaicin receptor may be present, or example, in a body fluid such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” is an amount that, upon administration, is sufficient to provide detectable patient relief from a condition being treated. Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms such as pain.
  • a “patient” is any individual treated with a compound (e.g., a VR1 modulator) as provided herein.
  • Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock.
  • Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation (e.g., pain, exposure to vanilloid ligand, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, respiratory disorders, cough and/or hiccup), or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic).
  • capsaicin receptor modulation e.g., pain, exposure to vanilloid ligand, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, respiratory disorders, cough and/or hiccup
  • treatment may be prophylactic.
  • the present invention provides substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of pain (e.g., neuropathic or peripheral nerve-mediated pain); exposure to capsaicin; exposure to acid, heat, light, tear gas air pollutants, pepper spray or related agents; respiratory conditions such as asthma or chronic obstructive pulmonary disease; itch; urinary incontinence or overactive bladder; cough or hiccup; and/or obesity.
  • pain e.g., neuropathic or peripheral nerve-mediated pain
  • exposure to capsaicin e.g., exposure to acid, heat, light, tear gas air pollutants, pepper spray or related agents
  • respiratory conditions such as asthma or chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
  • itch urinary incontinence or overactive bladder
  • cough or hiccup hiccup
  • obesity e.g., obesity
  • Such compounds may also be used within in vitro assays (e.g., assays for receptor activity), as
  • Certain compounds provided herein detectably modulate the binding of capsaicin to VR1 at nanomolar (i.e., submicromolar) concentrations, preferably at subnanomolar concentrations, more preferably at concentrations below 100 picomolar, 20 picomolar, 10 picomolar or 5 picomolar.
  • Such modulators are preferably not vanilloids.
  • Certain preferred modulators are VR1 antagonists and have no detectable agonist activity in the assay described in Example 6.
  • Preferred VR1 modulators further bind with high affinity to VR1, and do not substantially inhibit activity of human EGF receptor tyrosine kinase.
  • R c -M-A-R y if two adjacent variables are bonds, then the two variables are taken together to form a single bond. For example, if R c is C 0 alkyl and M and A are both single covalent bonds, then R 2 is —R y .
  • m is independently selected at each occurrence from 0, 1 and 2;
  • R x is independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl and C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl; and
  • R w is hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • representative Ar 2 groups include phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkylsulfonyl, amino, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino.
  • Ar 2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkylsulfonyl.
  • Ar 1 groups are phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy.
  • Ar 1 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl; and Ar 2 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkylsulfonyl.
  • Ar 1 , Y, Z, R 2 and R 7 are as described for Formula I; and Ar 2 is 5-to 10-membered heteroaryl that substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from oxo and groups of the formula LR a , as described above for Formula I.
  • each R 1 is hydrogen.
  • R 2 is: (i) hydrogen, hydroxy or halogen; or (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 -aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl
  • R 2 groups include C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, morpholinylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, piperazinylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, piperidinylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl and pyridylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl and C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl.
  • Ar 2 is a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., a 6-membered heteroaryl) that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from (a) groups of the formula LR a and (b) groups that are taken together to form a fused, 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from R b .
  • a 6-membered heteroaryl e.g., a 6-membered heteroaryl
  • Ar 2 groups include pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkylsulfonyl, amino, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino.
  • Ar 2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkylsulfonyl.
  • Ar 1 groups include phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy.
  • Ar 1 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl; and Ar 2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonyl or C 1 -C 4 haloalkylsulfonyl.
  • R 7 , Y, Z, Ar 1 and Ar 2 are as described above for Formula I; and R 2 is: (i) halogen or cyano;
  • R 2 is: (i) hydroxy or halogen; or (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl.
  • R 2 groups include C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, morpholinylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, piperazinylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, piperidinylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, phenylC 0 -C 2 alkyl and pyridylC 0 -C 2 alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl and C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl.
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently: (i) hydrogen; or (ii) C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkenyl or C 1 -C 8 alkylsulfonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, haloC 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and haloC 1 -C 6 alkoxy.
  • R 3 and R 4 are joined to form azetidine, pyrrolidine, morpholine, piperidine or piperazine, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, haloC 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and haloC 1 -C 6 alkoxy.
  • R 3 and R 4 of Formula IVa are each independently selected from (i) hydrogen or (ii) C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, C 3 -C 8 alkanone, C 1 -C 8 alkanoyl, C 2 -C 8 alkyl ether, C 6 -C 10 arylC 0 -C 8 alkyl, 5- to 10-membered heterocycleC 0 -C 8 alkyl and —(SO 2 )C 1 -C 8 alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from (i) hydrogen and (ii) C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, phenylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, indanylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroarylC 0 -C 4 alkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, haloC 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and haloC 1 -C 6 alkoxy.
  • R 3 and R 4 groups include C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, 5- to 7-membered heterocycloC 0 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, indanyl, benzyl, 1-phenyl-ethyl, 1-phenyl-propyl and 2-phenyl-ethyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen and C 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • R 3 and R 4 may be pyridylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, pyrimidylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, imidazolylC 0 -C 4 alkyl or tetrazolylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, each of which is substituted with 0, 1 or 2 substituents.
  • R 3 and/or R 4 may be joined to an R 5 or R 6 group (along with the N to which R 3 and R 4 are bound and any carbon atoms between the N and R 5 or R 6 ) to form an optionally substituted heterocycle, such as a 5- to 10-membered mono- or bi-cyclic group.
  • R 3 and/or R 4 of Formula II may form an optionally substituted heterocycle.
  • R 3 and R 4 may be joined to form, with the N to which they are bound, an optionally substituted heterocycle; or R 3 or R 4 may be joined to an R 5 or R 6 moiety to from an optionally substituted heterocycle.
  • the resulting heterocycle may be, for example, a 4- or 5- to 10-membered, mono- or bi-cyclic group substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents (e.g., from 1 to 4 substituents or 0, 1 or 2 substituents).
  • each substituent is independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, haloC 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, haloC 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, heterocycleC 0 -C 8 alkyl and heterocycleC 1 -C 8 alkoxycarbonyl.
  • such substituents are lower alkyl groups such as methyl and/or ethyl.
  • a heterocyclic group that comprises R 3 and/or R 4 may be a heteroaryl group, which comprises an aromatic ring (e.g., optionally substituted acridinyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, carbazolyl, cinnolinyl, indazolyl, indolinyl, indolyl, isoquinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, phenanthridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, phthalazinyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl or tetrahydroquinolinyl).
  • an aromatic ring e.g., optionally substituted acridinyl, benzimid
  • heteroaryl is 3,4-dihydro-1H-isoquinolin-2-yl.
  • the heterocycle may be an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl group, such as azepanyl, azocinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, morpholino, piperadinyl, piperazinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolinyl, thiomorpholino or 1,1-dioxo-thiomorpholin-4-yl.
  • Representative heterocycles that may be formed from R 3 and R 4 include, but are not limited to, optionally substituted azepane, azocane, dihydroisoquinoline, imidazole, morpholine, octahydroquinoline, piperazine, piperidine and pyrrolidine.
  • Representative heterocycles that may be formed from R 3 or R 4 , in combination with an R 5 or R 6 include (but are not limited to) optionally substituted piperadine and pyrrolidine
  • R 5 and R 6 of Formula IVa are independently (at each occurrence) hydrogen or optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl; in addition, or alternatively, any R 5 or R 6 may be joined with any other R 5 or R 6 to form an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, or (as discussed above) joined with R 3 or R 4 to form an optionally substituted heterocycle.
  • each R 5 and R 6 is C 1 -C 2 alkyl or hydrogen.
  • n may be 1, 2 or 3, with 1 preferred in certain embodiments.
  • Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Y and Z are as described for Formula IV; R 3 is selected from:
  • n 1, 2 or 3.
  • R 3 is: (i) hydrogen; or (ii) C 1 -C 8 alkyl substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy and mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino.
  • substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy and mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino.
  • R 3 is: (i) hydrogen or (ii) C 1 -C 8 alkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, C 3 -C 8 alkanone, C 2 -C 8 alkyl ether, C 6 -C 10 arylC 0 -C 8 alkyl, or 5- to 10-membered heterocycleC 0 -C 8 alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • R 3 of Formula IV is (i) hydrogen or (ii) C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, phenylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroarylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, or 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkylC 0 -C 4 alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, haloC 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and haloC 1 -C 6 alkoxy.
  • R 3 groups include hydrogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkyl ether and benzyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen and C 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • R 3 may be joined to an R 5 or R 6 group (along with the 0 to which R 3 is bound and any carbon atoms between the O and R 5 or R 6 ) to form an optionally substituted heterocycle, such as a 5- to 10-membered mono- or bi-cyclic group.
  • the resulting heterocycle may, for example, be substituted with from 0 to 4 (e.g., 0, 1 or 2) substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, haloC 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, haloC 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, heterocycleC 0 -C 8 alkyl and heterocycleC 1 -C 8 alkoxycarbonyl.
  • substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, haloC 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, haloC 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, heterocycleC 0 -C 8 alkyl and heterocycleC 1
  • R 5 and R 6 within certain embodiments of Formula III, are independently (at each occurrence) hydrogen or optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl; in addition, or alternatively, any R 5 or R 6 may be joined with any other R 5 or R 6 to form an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, or (as discussed above) joined with R 3 to form an optionally substituted heterocycle.
  • each R 5 and R 6 is C 1 -C 2 alkyl or hydrogen.
  • n may be 1, 2 or 3, with 1 preferred in certain embodiments.
  • R 2 is hydrogen, amino, hydroxy, halogen, or optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n NH 2 , —(CH 2 ) n NH(C 1 -C 8 alkyl), —(CH 2 ) n N(C 1 -C 8 alkyl) 2 , —(CH 2 ) n (5- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl), —(CH 2 ) n OH or —(CH 2 ) n O(C 1 -C 8 alkyl).
  • Optionally substituted groups include, for example, unsubstituted groups and groups substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, and haloC 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • Heterocycloalkyl groups include those in which the heterocycloalkyl comprises a nitrogen or oxygen atom directly linked to the —(CH 2 ) n .
  • Ar 1 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 substituents as described above; preferably such substituents, if any, are independently selected from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, haloC 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and haloC 1 -C 6 alkoxy.
  • Ar 1 may have one substituent selected from halogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, haloC 1 -C 6 alkyl and haloC 1 -C 6 alkoxy.
  • Ar 1 groups include, but are not limited to, pyridin-2-yl, 3-methyl-pyridin-2-yl, 3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl and 3-halo-pyridin-2-yl.
  • Ar 2 within certain embodiments of the formulas provided herein, is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 substituents as described above. In certain embodiments, one such substituent is located at the para position of a 6-membered Ar 2 .
  • Optional Ar 2 substituents are as described above and include, for example, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkyl ether, C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 alkanoyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkylsulfonyl, C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonamide, C 1 -C 6 haloalkylsulfonamide, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino and 3- to 10-membered heterocycles.
  • Preferred Ar 2 substituents include C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 halolkyl and groups of the formula —(SO 2 )R a , wherein R a is C 1 -C 4 alkyl or haloC 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • Ar 2 groups include phenyl, pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl and thiadiazolyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from halogen, cyano, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, haloC 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, haloC 1 -C 6 alkoxy, —SO 2 —R a and —SO 2 NR x —R a .
  • Ar 2 groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl, 2-pyridyl and 3-pyridyl, each of which is substituted at the para-position with halogen, cyano, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoro-1-methyl-ethyl, methanesulfonyl, ethanesulfonyl, propanesulfonyl, propane-2-sulfonyl, trifluoromethanesulfonyl or 2,2,2-trifluoroethanesulfonyl.
  • substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues detectably alter (modulate) VR1 activity, as determined using an in vitro VR1 functional assay such as a calcium mobilization assay, dorsal root ganglion assay or in vivo pain relief assay.
  • an in vitro VR1 functional assay such as a calcium mobilization assay, dorsal root ganglion assay or in vivo pain relief assay.
  • a VR1 ligand binding assay may be used as an initial screen for such activity.
  • References herein to a “VR1 ligand binding assay” are intended to refer to a standard in vitro receptor binding assay such as that provided in Example 5, and a “calcium mobilization assay” (also referred to herein as a “signal transduction assay”) may be performed as described in Example 6.
  • a competition assay may be performed in which a VR1 preparation is incubated with labeled (e.g., 125 I or 3 H) compound that binds to VR1 (e.g., a capsaicin receptor agonist such as RTX) and unlabeled test compound.
  • labeled e.g., 125 I or 3 H
  • the VR1 used is preferably mammalian VR1, more preferably human or rat VR1.
  • the receptor may be recombinantly expressed or naturally expressed.
  • the VR1 preparation may be, for example, a membrane preparation from HEK293 or CHO cells that recombinantly express human VR1.
  • Incubation with a compound that detectably modulates vanilloid ligand binding to VR1 results in a decrease or increase in the amount of label bound to the VR1 preparation, relative to the amount of label bound in the absence of the compound. This decrease or increase may be used to determine the K i at VR1 as described herein. In general, compounds that decrease the amount of label bound to the VR1 preparation within such an assay are preferred.
  • IC 50 values for such compounds may be determined using a standard in vitro VR1-mediated calcium mobilization assay, as provided in Example 6. Briefly, cells expressing capsaicin receptor are contacted with a compound of interest and with an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration (e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3 or Fura-2 (both of which are available, for example, from Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.), each of which produce a fluorescent signal when bound to Ca ++ ). Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator in solution.
  • an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3 or Fura-2 (both of which are available, for example, from Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.
  • Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator
  • a vanilloid receptor agonist e.g., capsaicin, RTX or olvanil
  • a fluorescence response is measured.
  • agonist-contacted cells are contacted with a compound that is a VR1 antagonist the fluorescence response is generally reduced by at least 20%, preferably at least 50% and more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of test compound.
  • the IC 50 for VR1 antagonists provided herein is preferably less than 1 micromolar, less than 100 nM, less than 10 nM or less than 1 nM.
  • Capsaicin receptor agonist activity may generally be determined as described in Example 6.
  • the fluorescence response is generally increased by an amount that is at least 30% of the increase observed when cells are contacted with 100 nM capsaicin.
  • the EC 50 for VR1 agonists provided herein is preferably less than 1 micromolar, less than 100 nM or less than 10 nM.
  • VR1 modulating activity may also, or alternatively, be assessed using a cultured dorsal root ganglion assay as provided in Example 9 and/or an in vivo pain relief assay as provided in Example 10.
  • Compounds provided herein preferably have a statistically significant specific effect on VR1 activity within one or more functional assays provided herein.
  • VR1 modulators provided herein do not substantially modulate ligand binding to other cell surface receptors, such as EGF receptor tyrosine kinase or the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor.
  • such modulators do not substantially inhibit activity of a cell surface receptor such as the human epidermal growth factor (EGF) receptor tyrosine kinase or the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor (e.g., the IC 50 or IC 40 at such a receptor is preferably greater than 1 micromolar, and most preferably greater than 10 micromolar).
  • EGF human epidermal growth factor
  • a modulator does not detectably inhibit EGF receptor activity or nicotinic acetylcholine receptor activity at a concentration of 0.5 micromolar, 1 micromolar or more preferably 10 micromolar.
  • Assays for determining cell surface receptor activity are commercially available, and include the tyrosine kinase assay kits available from Panvera (Madison, Wis.).
  • Preferred compounds provided herein are non-sedating.
  • a dose of compound that is twice the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia in an animal model for determining pain relief causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than 1 ⁇ 2 the time that pain relief lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al. (1988) Toxicology 49 (2-3):433-9).
  • a dose that is five times the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia does not produce statistically significant sedation.
  • a compound provided herein does not produce sedation at intravenous doses of less than 25 mg/kg (preferably less than 10 mg/kg) or at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
  • compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound to be achieved at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred VR1 modulator is nontoxic when a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred VR1 modulator produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred VR1 modulator exhibits an in vitro half-life that is equal to an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I.D.
  • assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers.
  • Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously).
  • Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays.
  • nontoxic compounds are nontoxic.
  • the term “nontoxic” as used herein shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans).
  • FDA United States Food and Drug Administration
  • a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, and (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
  • a compound that “does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production” is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 8, herein.
  • cells treated as described in Example 8 with 100 ⁇ M of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated compound that “does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals” is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of twice the minimum dose yielding a therapeutically effective in vivo concentration.
  • a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals.
  • statically significant is meant results varying from control at the p ⁇ 0.1 level or more preferably at the p ⁇ 0.05 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
  • a compound “does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes” if administration of twice the minimum dose yielding a therapeutically effective in vivo concentration does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory rodents by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls.
  • a compound “does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes” if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) equivalent to two-fold the minimum in vivo therapeutic concentration of the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells.
  • concentrations in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro
  • certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the minimum therapeutically effective in vivo concentration.
  • Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal to the minimum therapeutically effective in vivo concentration.
  • certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
  • VR1 modulators provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled.
  • compounds recited in Formulas I-III may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 11 C, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 O, 17 O, 31 P, 32 P, 35 S, 18 F and 36 Cl.
  • substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods. Starting materials are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich Corp. (St. Louis, Mo.), or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols. By way of example, a synthetic route similar to that shown in any of the following Schemes may be used, together with synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry. Each variable in the following schemes refers to any group consistent with the description of the compounds provided herein.
  • a compound provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms.
  • Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms.
  • All stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers (i.e., optically active forms).
  • Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
  • Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope.
  • Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14 C), hydrogen (e.g., 3 H), sulfur (e.g., 35 S), or iodine (e.g., 125 I).
  • Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous-catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate.
  • certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate.
  • Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
  • compositions comprising one or more substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives.
  • other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
  • compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration.
  • parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique.
  • compositions suitable for oral use are preferred. Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs.
  • compositions of the present invention may be formulated as a lyophilizate.
  • Formulation for topical administration may be preferred for certain conditions (e.g., in the treatment of skin conditions such as burns or itch).
  • Formulation for direct administration into the bladder may be preferred for treatment of urinary incontinence and overactive bladder.
  • Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations.
  • Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets.
  • excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc).
  • inert diluents e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate
  • granulating and disintegrating agents e.g., corn starch or
  • the tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period.
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
  • an inert solid diluent e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • an oil medium e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil
  • Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions.
  • excipients include suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monoole
  • Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin.
  • the oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations.
  • Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, suspending agent and one or more preservatives.
  • a dispersing or wetting agent e.g., glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerin, glycerin, glycerin, glycerin, glycerin, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol
  • compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally-occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate).
  • An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • sweetening agents such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose.
  • Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components.
  • Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery.
  • Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols (e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols (e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols (e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid-based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices.
  • organic solvents such as alcohols (e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin
  • glycols e.g., butylene, isoprene or
  • a composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials.
  • stabilizing agents such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules.
  • a topical formulation may be prepared in a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions.
  • the physical appearance and viscosity of such forms can be governed by the presence and amount of emulsifier(s) and viscosity adjuster(s) present in the formulation.
  • Solids are generally firm and non-pourable and commonly are formulated as bars or sticks, or in particulate form; solids can be opaque or transparent, and optionally can contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Creams and lotions are often similar to one another, differing mainly in their viscosity; both lotions and creams may be opaque, translucent or clear and often contain emulsifiers, solvents, and viscosity adjusting agents, as well as moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Gels can be prepared with a range of viscosities, from thick or high viscosity to thin or low viscosity.
  • These formulations may also contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Liquids are thinner than creams, lotions, or gels and often do not contain emulsifiers.
  • Liquid topical products often contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Suitable emulsifiers for use in topical formulations include, but are not limited to, ionic emulsifiers, cetearyl alcohol, non-ionic emulsifiers like polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, PEG-40 stearate, ceteareth-12, ceteareth-20, ceteareth-30, ceteareth alcohol, PEG-100 stearate and glyceryl stearate.
  • Suitable viscosity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to, protective colloids or non-ionic gums such as hydroxyethylcellulose, xanthan gum, magnesium aluminum silicate, silica, microcrystalline wax, beeswax, paraffin, and cetyl palmitate.
  • a gel composition may be formed by the addition of a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate.
  • a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate.
  • Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic, amphoteric, ionic and anionic surfactants.
  • dimethicone copolyol polysorbate 20, polysorbate 40, polysorbate 60, polysorbate 80, lauramide DEA, cocamide DEA, and cocamide MEA, oleyl betaine, cocamidopropyl phosphatidyl PG-dimonium chloride, and ammonium laureth sulfate may be used within topical formulations.
  • Suitable preservatives include, but are not limited to, antimicrobials such as methylparaben, propylparaben, sorbic acid, benzoic acid, and formaldehyde, as well as physical stabilizers and antioxidants such as vitamin E, sodium ascorbate/ascorbic acid and propyl gallate.
  • Suitable moisturizers include, but are not limited to, lactic acid and other hydroxy acids and their salts, glycerin, propylene glycol, and butylene glycol.
  • Suitable emollients include lanolin alcohol, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, cholesterol, petrolatum, isostearyl neopentanoate and mineral oils.
  • Suitable fragrances and colors include, but are not limited to, FD&C Red No. 40 and FD&C Yellow No. 5.
  • Suitable additional ingredients include, but are not limited to, abrasives, absorbents, anti-caking agents, anti-foaming agents, anti-static agents, astringents (e.g., witch hazel, alcohol and herbal extracts such as chamomile extract), binders/excipients, buffering agents, chelating agents, film forming agents, conditioning agents, propellants, opacifying agents, pH adjusters and protectants.
  • An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation of a gel is: hydroxypropylcellulose (2.1%); 70/30 isopropyl alcohol/water (90.9%); propylene glycol (5.1%); and Polysorbate 80 (1.9%).
  • An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation as a foam is: cetyl alcohol (1.1%); stearyl alcohol (0.5%; Quaternium 52 (1.0%); propylene glycol (2.0%); Ethanol 95 PGF3 (61.05%); deionized water (30.05%); P75 hydrocarbon propellant (4.30%). All percents are by weight.
  • Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing. Controlled release vehicles can also be used.
  • a pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectible aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • the modulator depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle.
  • Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
  • suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
  • the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectible compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
  • compositions may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration).
  • Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non-irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug.
  • suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
  • compositions may be formulated as sustained release formulations (i.e., a formulation such as a capsule that effects a slow release of modulator following administration).
  • sustained release formulations i.e., a formulation such as a capsule that effects a slow release of modulator following administration.
  • Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site.
  • Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • a modulator may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock).
  • Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
  • VR1 modulators are generally administered in a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount, and preferably a therapeutically effective amount.
  • Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day (e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses (e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day).
  • the amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated and the particular mode of administration. Dosage units will generally contain between from about 10 ⁇ g to about 500 mg of an active ingredient. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art.
  • compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to VR1 modulation (e.g., treatment of exposure to vanilloid ligand, pain, itch, obesity or urinary incontinence).
  • Packaged pharmaceutical compositions may include a container holding a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein and instructions (e.g., labeling) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to VR1 modulation in the patient.
  • VR1 antagonists may be used to inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand agonist (such as capsaicin and/or RTX) to capsaicin receptor in vitro or in vivo.
  • vanilloid ligand agonist such as capsaicin and/or RTX
  • such methods comprise the step of contacting a capsaicin receptor with a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of one or more VR1 modulators provided herein, in the presence of vanilloid ligand in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the ligand to capsaicin receptor.
  • the capsaicin receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell.
  • the capsaicin receptor is expressed by a neuronal cell present in a patient, and the aqueous solution is a body fluid.
  • one or more VR1 modulators are administered to an animal in an amount such that the analogue is present in at least one body fluid of the animal at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 1 micromolar or less; preferably 500 nanomolar or less; more preferably 100 nanomolar or less, 50 nanomolar or less, 20 nanomolar or less, or 10 nanomolar or less.
  • such compounds may be administered at a dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg.
  • modulation may be achieved by contacting a capsaicin receptor (either in vitro or in vivo) with a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of one or more VR1 modulators provided herein under conditions suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to the receptor.
  • the receptor may be present in solution or suspension, in a cultured or isolated cell preparation or in a cell within a patient.
  • the cell may be a neuronal cell that is contacted in vivo in an animal.
  • the cell may be an epithelial cell, such as a urinary bladder epithelial cell (urothelial cell) or an airway epithelial cell that is contacted in vivo in an animal.
  • Modulation of signal tranducing activity may be assessed by detecting an effect on calcium ion conductance (also referred to as calcium mobilization or flux).
  • Modulation of signal transducing activity may alternatively be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., pain, burning sensation, broncho-constriction, inflammation, cough, hiccup, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder) of a patient being treated with one or more VR1 modulators provided herein.
  • a symptom e.g., pain, burning sensation, broncho-constriction, inflammation, cough, hiccup, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder
  • VR1 modulator(s) provided herein are preferably administered to a patient (e.g., a human) orally or topically, and are present within at least one body fluid of the animal while modulating VR1 signal-transducing activity.
  • Preferred VR1 modulators for use in such methods modulate VR1 signal-transducing activity in vitro at a concentration of 1 nanomolar or less, preferably 100 picomolar or less, more preferably 20 picomolar or less, and in vivo at a concentration of 1 micromolar or less, 500 nanomolar or less, or 100 nanomolar or less in a body fluid such as blood.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to VR1 modulation.
  • treatment encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms).
  • a condition is “responsive to VR1 modulation” if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of a capsaicin receptor, regardless of the amount of vanilloid ligand present locally, and/or if modulation of capsaicin receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof.
  • Such conditions include, for example, symptoms resulting from exposure to VR1-activating stimuli, pain, respiratory disorders such as asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, cough, hiccup, and obesity, as described in more detail below.
  • Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art.
  • Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above.
  • Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated. However, for treatment of most disorders, a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred. In general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred. For the treatment of acute pain, a single dose that rapidly reaches effective concentrations is desirable. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. In general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
  • Patients experiencing symptoms resulting from exposure to capsaicin receptor-activating stimuli include individuals with burns caused by heat, light, tear gas or acid and those whose mucous membranes are exposed (e.g., via ingestion, inhalation or eye contact) to capsaicin (e.g., from hot peppers or in pepper spray) or a related irritant such as acid, tear gas or air pollutants.
  • the resulting symptoms may include, for example, pain, broncho-constriction and inflammation.
  • Pain that may be treated using the VR1 modulators provided herein may be chronic or acute and includes, but is not limited to, peripheral nerve-mediated pain (especially neuropathic pain).
  • Compounds provided herein may be used in the treatment of, for example, postmastectomy pain syndrome, stump pain, phantom limb pain, oral neuropathic pain, toothache (dental pain), denture pain, postherpetic neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, fibromyalgia, Guillain-Barre syndrome, meralgia paresthetica, burning-mouth syndrome and/or bilateral peripheral neuropathy.
  • Additional neuropathic pain conditions include causalgia (reflex sympathetic dystrophy —RSD, secondary to injury of a peripheral nerve), neuritis (including, for example, sciatic neuritis, peripheral neuritis, polyneuritis, optic neuritis, postfebrile neuritis, migrating neuritis, segmental neuritis and Gombault's neuritis), neuronitis, neuralgias (e.g., those mentioned above, cervicobrachial neuralgia, cranial neuralgia, geniculate neuralgia, glossopharyngial neuralgia, migranous neuralgia, idiopathic neuralgia, intercostals neuralgia, mammary neuralgia, mandibular joint neuralgia, Morton's neuralgia, nasociliary neuralgia, occipital neuralgia, red neuralgia, Sluder's neuralgia, splenopalatine neuralg
  • Headache including headaches involving peripheral nerve activity, such as sinus, cluster (i.e., migranous neuralgia) and some tension headaches and migraine, may also be treated as described herein.
  • migraine headaches may be prevented by administration of a compound provided herein as soon as a pre-migrainous aura is experienced by the patient.
  • Further pain conditions that can be treated as described herein include “burning mouth syndrome,” labor pains, Charcot's pains, intestinal gas pains, menstrual pain, acute and chronic back pain (e.g., lower back pain), hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, homotopic pain and heterotopic pain—including cancer associated pain (e.g., in patients with bone cancer), pain (and inflammation) associated with venom exposure (e.g., due to snake bite, spider bite, or insect sting) and trauma associated pain (e.g., post-surgical pain, pain from cuts, bruises and broken bones, and burn pain).
  • Additional pain conditions that may be treated as described herein include pain associated with inflammatory bowel disease, irritable bowel syndrome and/or inflammatory bowel disease.
  • VR1 modulators provided herein may be used for the treatment of mechanical pain.
  • mechanical pain refers to pain other than headache pain that is not neuropathic or a result of exposure to heat, cold or external chemical stimuli.
  • Mechanical pain includes physical trauma (other than thermal or chemical burns or other irritating and/or painful exposures to noxious chemicals) such as post-surgical pain and pain from cuts, bruises and broken bones; toothache, denture pain; nerve root pain; osteoarthritis; rheumatoid arthritis; fibromyalgia; meralgia paresthetica; back pain; cancer-associated pain; angina; carpel tunnel syndrome; and pain resulting from bone fracture, labor, hemorrhoids, intestinal gas, dyspepsia, and menstruation.
  • Itching conditions that may be treated include psoriatic pruritis, itch due to hemodialysis, aguagenic pruritus, and itching associated with vulvar vestibulitis, contact dermatitis, insect bites and skin allergies.
  • Urinary tract conditions that may be treated as described herein include urinary incontinence (including overflow incontinence, urge incontinence and stress incontinence), as well as overactive or unstable bladder conditions (including detrusor hyperflexia of spinal origin and bladder hypersensitivity).
  • VR1 modulator is administered via a catheter or similar device, resulting in direct injection of VR1 modulator into the bladder.
  • Compounds provided herein may also be used as anti-tussive agents (to prevent, relieve or suppress coughing) and for the treatment of hiccup, and to promote weight loss in an obese patient.
  • VR1 modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions involving inflammatory components.
  • Such conditions include, for example, autoimmune disorders and pathologic autoimmune responses known to have an inflammatory component including, but not limited to, arthritis (especially rheumatoid arthritis), psoriasis, Crohn's disease, lupus erythematosus, irritable bowel syndrome, tissue graft rejection, and hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs.
  • Other such conditions include trauma (e.g., injury to the head or spinal cord), cardio- and cerebo-vascular disease and certain infectious diseases.
  • a VR1 modulator is administered to a patient along with an anti-inflammatory agent.
  • the VR1 modulator and anti-inflammatory agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order.
  • Anti-inflammatory agents include, for example, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), non-specific and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) specific cyclooxygenase enzyme inhibitors, gold compounds, corticosteroids, methotrexate, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor antagonists, anti-TNF alpha antibodies, anti-C5 antibodies, and interleukin-1 (IL-1) receptor antagonists.
  • NSAIDs include, but are not limited to ibuprofen (e.g., ADVILTM, MOTRINTM), flurbiprofen (ANSAIDTM), naproxen or naproxen sodium (e.g., NAPROSYN, ANAPROX, ALEVETM), diclofenac (e.g., CATAFLAMTM, VOLTARENTM), combinations of diclofenac sodium and misoprostol (e.g., ARTHROTECTM), sulindac (CLINORILTM), oxaprozin (DAYPROTM), diflunisal (DOLOBIDTM), piroxicam (FELDENETM), indomethacin (INDOCINTM), etodolac (LODINETM), fenoprofen calcium (NALFONTM), ketoprofen (e.g., ORUDISTM, ORUVAILTM), sodium nabumetone (RELAFENTM), sulfasalazine (
  • NSAIDs consists of compounds that inhibit cyclooxygenase (COX) enzymes, such as celecoxib (CELEBREXTM) and rofecoxib (VIOXXTM).
  • COX cyclooxygenase
  • NSAIDs further include salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline and magnesium salicylates (TRILISATETM), and salsalate (DISALCIDTM), as well as corticosteroids such as cortisone (CORTONETM acetate), dexamethasone (e.g., DECADRONTM), methylprednisolone (MEDROLTM) prednisolone (PRELONETM), prednisolone sodium phosphate (PEDIAPREDTM), and prednisone (e.g., PREDNICEN-MTM, DELTASONETM, STERAPREDTM).
  • COX cyclooxygenase
  • Suitable dosages for VR1 modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of anti-inflammatory agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference . In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a VR1 modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the anti-inflammatory agent required to produce a therapeutic effect. Thus, preferably, the dosage of anti-inflammatory agent in a combination or combination treatment method of the invention is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent without combination administration of a VR1 antagonist.
  • this dosage is less than 3 ⁇ 4, even more preferably less than 1 ⁇ 2, and highly preferably, less than 1 ⁇ 4 of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent(s) when administered without combination administration of a VR1 antagonist. It will be apparent that the dosage amount of VR1 antagonist component of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be affected by the dosage amount and potency of the anti-inflammatory agent component of the combination.
  • the combination administration of a VR1 modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent is accomplished by packaging one or more VR1 modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more VR1 antagonists and one or more anti-inflammatory agents.
  • Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like).
  • the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more VR1 modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents are to be taken together for the treatment of an inflammatory pain condition.
  • the anti-inflammatory agent(s) include at least one COX-2 specific cyclooxygenase enzyme inhibitor such as valdecoxib (BEXTRA®), lumiracoxib (PREXIGETM), etoricoxib (ARCOXIA®), celecoxib (CELEBREX®) and/or rofecoxib (VIOXX®).
  • COX-2 specific cyclooxygenase enzyme inhibitor such as valdecoxib (BEXTRA®), lumiracoxib (PREXIGETM), etoricoxib (ARCOXIA®), celecoxib (CELEBREX®) and/or rofecoxib (VIOXX®).
  • VR1 modulators provided herein may be used in combination with one or more additional pain relief medications.
  • Certain such medications are also anti-inflammatory agents, and are listed above.
  • Other such medications are narcotic analgesic agents, which typically act at one or more opioid receptor subtypes (e.g., ⁇ , ⁇ and/or ⁇ ), preferably as agonists or partial agonists.
  • opioid receptor subtypes e.g., ⁇ , ⁇ and/or ⁇
  • Such agents include opiates, opiate derivatives and opioids, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof.
  • narcotic analgesics include, within preferred embodiments, alfentanyl, alphaprodine, anileridine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, codeine, diacetyldihydromorphine, diacetylmorphine, dihydrocodeine, diphenoxylate, ethylmorphine, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, isomethadone, levomethorphan, levorphane, levorphanol, meperidine, metazocine, methadone, methorphan, metopon, morphine, opium extracts, opium fluid extracts, powdered opium, granulated opium, raw opium, tincture of opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, paregoric, pentazocine, pethidine, phenazocine, piminodine, propoxyphene, racemethorphan, racemorphan, thebaine and pharmaceutically acceptable salt
  • narcotic analgesic agents include acetorphine, acetyldihydrocodeine, acetylmethadol, allylprodine, alphracetylmethadol, alphameprodine, alphamethadol, benzethidine, benzylmorphine, betacetylmethadol, betameprodine, betamethadol, betaprodine, butorphanol, clonitazene, codeine methylbromide, codeine-N-oxide, cyprenorphine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, diampromide, diethylthiambutene, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiamubutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, drotebanol, ethanol, ethylmethylthiambutene, etonit
  • analgesic agents include, for example: TALWIN® Nx and DEMEROL® (both available from Sanofi Winthrop Pharmaceuticals; New York, N.Y.); LEVO-DROMORAN®; BUPRENEX® (Reckitt & Coleman Pharmaceuticals, Inc.; Richmond, Va.); MSIR® (Purdue Pharma L.P.; Norwalk, Conn.); DILAUDID® (Knoll Pharmaceutical Co.; Mount Olive, N.J.); SUBLIMAZE®; SUFENTA® (Janssen Pharmaceutica Inc.; Titusville, N.J.); PERCOCET®, NUBAIN® and NUMORPHAN® (all available from Endo Pharmaceuticals Inc.; Chadds Ford, Pa.) HYDROSTAT® IR, MS/S and MS/L (all available from Richwood Pharmaceutical Co.
  • TALWIN® Nx and DEMEROL® both available from Sanofi Winthrop Pharmaceuticals; New York, N.Y.
  • Still further analgesic agents include CB2-receptor agonists, such as AM1241, and compounds that bind to the ⁇ 2 ⁇ subunit, such as Neurontin (Gabapentin) and pregabalin.
  • Suitable dosages for VR1 modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of other pain relief medications can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference .
  • the combination administration of a VR1 modulator with one or more additional pain medications results in a reduction of the dosage of each therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (e.g., the dosage or one or both agent may less than 3 ⁇ 4, less than 1 ⁇ 2, less than 1 ⁇ 4 or less than 10% of the maximum dose listed above or advised by the manufacturer).
  • the combination administration of a VR1 modulator with one or more additional pain relief medications is accomplished by packaging one or more VR1 modulators and one or more additional pain relief medications in the same package, as described above.
  • Modulators that are VR1 agonists may further be used, for example, in crowd control (as a substitute for tear gas) or personal protection (e.g., in a spray formulation) or as pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of pain, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder via capsaicin receptor desensitization.
  • crowd control as a substitute for tear gas
  • personal protection e.g., in a spray formulation
  • pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of pain, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder via capsaicin receptor desensitization e.g., in a spray formulation
  • compounds for use in crowd control or personal protection are formulated and used according to conventional tear gas or pepper spray technology.
  • the present invention provides a variety of non-pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the compounds provided herein.
  • such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of capsaicin receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof).
  • compounds provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites.
  • compounds provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity, as standards for determining the ability of a candidate agent to bind to capsaicin receptor, or as radiotracers for positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or for single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT).
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • SPECT single photon emission computerized tomography
  • Such methods can be used to characterize capsaicin receptors in living subjects.
  • a VR1 modulator may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and incubated with a sample for a suitable incubation time (e.g., determined by first assaying a time course of binding).
  • unbound compound is removed (e.g., by washing), and bound compound detected using any method suitable for the label employed (e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups).
  • any method suitable for the label employed e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups.
  • a matched sample containing labeled compound and a greater (e.g., 10-fold greater) amount of unlabeled compound may be processed in the same manner. A greater amount of detectable label remaining in the test sample than in the control indicates the presence of capsaicin receptor in the sample.
  • Detection assays including receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of capsaicin receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York.
  • Modulators provided herein may also be used within a variety of well known cell separation methods.
  • modulators may be linked to the interior surface of a tissue culture plate or other support, for use as affinity ligands for immobilizing and thereby isolating, capsaicin receptors (e.g., isolating receptor-expressing cells) in vitro.
  • a modulator linked to a fluorescent marker such as fluorescein, is contacted with the cells, which are then analyzed (or isolated) by fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • Modulators provided herein may further be used within assays for the identification of other agents that bind to capsaicin receptor.
  • assays are standard competition binding assays, in which bound, labeled VR1 modulator is displaced by a test compound.
  • such assays are performed by: (a) contacting capsaicin receptor with a radiolabeled VR1 modulator as described herein, under conditions that permit binding of the VR1 modulator to capsaicin receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled VR1 modulator; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled VR1 modulator in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled VR1 modulator with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled VR1 modulator in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b), and therefrom identifying an agent that binds to capsaicin receptor.
  • mass spectroscopy data is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode with a 15V or 30V cone voltage, using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT, equipped with a Waters 600 pump, Waters 996 photodiode array detector, Gilson 215 autosampler, and a Gilson 841 microinjector.
  • MassLynx (Advanced Chemistry Development, Inc; Toronto, Canada) version 4.0 software was used for data collection and analysis. Sample volume of 1 microliter was injected onto a 50 ⁇ 4.6 mm Chromolith SpeedROD C18 column, and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at 6 ml/min flow rate. Sample was detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340 nm UV range. The elution conditions were: Mobile Phase A—95/5/0.05 Water/Methanol/TFA; Mobile Phase B—5/95/0.025 Water/Methanol/TFA.
  • the total run time was 2 minutes inject to inject.
  • the IC 50 determined as described in Example 6, herein, is 1 micromolar or less.
  • 2-cyano-3-trifluoromethylpyridine 179 g; 1.04 mol
  • THF 1200 mL
  • 3.0 M MeMgI/Et2O 694 mL
  • the reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for another 30 minutes, and is then slowly poured over 3.0 kg of crushed ice in a 12 liter vessel with stirring (6° C.).
  • the undissolved magnesium salts from the original reaction vessel are quenched with ice (750 g) and transferred to the 12 liter vessel.
  • the resulting mixture is acidified with 6.0 N aq. HCl to pH 2.0 and stirred for 30 minutes at ⁇ 10° C.
  • the mixture is then extracted with EtOAc (5 ⁇ 1 liters), and the combined extracts are washed with brine (1.5 liters) and dried with Na 2 SO 4 (500 g).
  • the dried extract is filtered and concentrated in vacuum at 40° C. to afford a dark brown oil.
  • the crude product is distilled under vacuum to give 2-acetyl-3-trifluoromethylpyridine as a clear pale yellow liquid.
  • 6-Amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carbonitrile (2.33 g, 8.82 mmol) is dissolved in 12M HCl (50 mL) and heated at 110° C. overnight. The aqueous acid is removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as its hydrochloride salt.
  • 6-Amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carboxylic acid hydrochloride (11.33 g, 35.44 mmol), N-hydroxy-succinimide (8.15 g, 70.9 mmol), and EDCl (10.19 g, 53.16 mmol) are dissolved in a solution of dry THF (100 mL) and Hunig's base (16.12 g, 125 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at room temperature. Ethyl acetate (200 mL) is added and the organic phase extracted with water (3 ⁇ 100 mL) and brine (100 mL). The organic extract is dried over Na 2 SO 4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as a brown foam.
  • the aqueous portion is acidified with concentrated hydrochloric acid and extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (4 ⁇ 100 mL).
  • the combined organic extracts are dried over Na 2 SO 4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as a light brown oil that solidifies upon standing.
  • Dimethyl 1,3-acetonedicarboxylate (20.0 g, 115 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of 1,1,1,2-tetramethoxy-ethane (23.8 g, 158 mmol) and acetic anhydride (420 mL) and the solution is heated to reflux for 4 hours. The mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure. Toluene (200 mL) is added and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound.
  • 2-(1,2-Dimethoxy-ethylidene)-3-oxo-pentanedioic acid dimethyl ester (29.8 g, 115 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of EtOH (250 mL), water (250 mL) and concentrated NH 4 OH(aq) (30 mL). The mixture is heated to 60° C. for 5 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and the EtOH removed under reduced pressure. The remaining aqueous solution is cooled in an ice bath and acidified with concentrated hydrochloric acid, at which time a white precipitate appeared. The precipitate is collected and dried in a vacuum oven to yield the title compound.
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-3-nitro-pyridine-2,4-diol (725 mg, 3.63 mmol) is added to a solution of POCl 3 (15 mL) at 0° C. The mixture is warmed to room temperature followed by heating at reflux for 5 hours. Excess POCl 3 is removed under reduced pressure to yield a light brown oil. The crude oil is dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (100 mL) and extracted with water (100 mL), NaHCO 3 (100 mL), and brine (100 mL). The organic extract is dried over Na 2 SO 4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is chromatographed on silica gel eluting with hexanes/EtOAc (4:1) to yield the title compound as a light yellow oil.
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-3-nitro-pyridine-2,4-diamine (455 mg, 2.29 mmol) is dissolved in EtOH (50 mL) and 10% Pd/C (50 mg) is added. The mixture is hydrogenated at 50 psi for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through Celite and the Celite bed washed with EtOH (25 mL). The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as an off-white solid.
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-2,3,4-triamino-pyridine (353 mg, 2.10 mmol), 2-bromo-1-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-ethanone hydrobromide (771 mg, 2.21 mmol; synthesis described in Example 2E, below), and NaHCO 3 (554 mg, 6.59 mmol) are dissolved into a solution of dioxane (20 mL) and water (20 mL).
  • the reaction mixture is stirred 1 hour at room temperature and 3 hours at 100° C.
  • the mixture is cooled and filtered through Celite.
  • the Celite bed is washed with EtOAc (20 mL).
  • the aqueous mixture is extracted with EtOAc (4 ⁇ 100 mL).
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-ylamine (252 mg, 0.751 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of acetic acid (2 mL) and water (5 mL). The mixture is heated to 50° C. and sodium nitrite (362 mg, 5.26 mmol) is added in portions over 1 hour. The solution is warmed to 70° C. and stirred overnight. Water (20 mL) is added and the aqueous mixture is extracted with EtOAc (4 ⁇ 50 mL). The combined organic extracts are washed with brine and dried over Na 2 SO 4 . The solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is chromatographed on silica gel eluting with hexanes/acetone (1:1) to afford the title compound as a white solid.
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-ol (146 mg, 0.436 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of CHCl 3 (20 mL), POCl 3 (0.12 ml, 1.31 mmol) and 2,6-lutidine (0.2 mL, 1.31 mmol). The mixture is heated at reflux overnight. The reaction is concentrated under reduced pressure. EtOAc (30 mL) is added and the mixture is extracted with NaHCO 3 (aq) (30 mL) and brine (30 mL). The organic extract is dried over Na 2 SO 4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is purified by silica gel preparatory TLC eluting with hexanes/EtOAc (1:1) to yield the title compound as a light yellow oil that solidifies upon standing.
  • IC 50 IC 50 determined as described in Example 6 is 1 micromolar or less (i.e., the concentration of such compounds that is required to provide a 50% decrease in the fluorescence response of cells exposed to one IC 50 of capsaicin is 1 micromolar or less).
  • This Example illustrates the preparation of VR1-transfected cells and membrane preparations for use in binding assays (Example 5) and functional assays (Example 6).
  • a cDNA encoding full length human capsaicin receptor (SEQ ID NO:1, 2 or 3 of U.S. Pat. No. 6,482,611) was subcloned in the plasmid pBK-CMV (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) for recombinant expression in mammalian cells.
  • HEK293 Human embryonic kidney (HEK293) cells were transfected with the pBK-CMV expression construct encoding the full length human capsaicin receptor using standard methods. The transfected cells were selected for two weeks in media containing G418 (400 ⁇ g/ml) to obtain a pool of stably transfected cells. Independent clones were isolated from this pool by limiting dilution to obtain clonal stable cell lines for use in subsequent experiments.
  • cells were seeded in T175 cell culture flasks in media without antibiotics and grown to approximately 90% confluency. The flasks were then washed with PBS and harvested in PBS containing 5 mM EDTA. The cells were pelleted by gentle centrifugation and stored at ⁇ 80° C. until assayed.
  • Previously frozen cells were disrupted with the aid of a tissue homogenizer in ice-cold HEPES homogenization buffer (5 mM KCl 5, 5.8 mM NaCl, 0.75 mM CaCl 2 , 2 mM MgCl 2 , 320 mM sucrose, and 10 mM HEPES pH 7.4). Tissue homogenates were first centrifuged for 10 minutes at 1000 ⁇ g (4° C.) to remove the nuclear fraction and debris, and then the supernatant from the first centrifugation is further centrifuged for 30 minutes at 35,000 ⁇ g (4° C.) to obtain a partially purified membrane fraction. Membranes were resuspended in the HEPES homogenization buffer prior to the assay. An aliquot of this membrane homogenate is used to determine protein concentration via the Bradford method (BIO-RAD Protein Assay Kit, #500-0001, BIO-RAD, Hercules, Calif.).
  • This Example illustrates a representative assay of capsaicin receptor binding that may be used to determine the binding affinity of compounds for the capsaicin (VR1) receptor.
  • RTX Resiniferatoxin
  • RTX (37 Ci/mmol) is synthesized by and obtained from the Chemical Synthesis and Analysis Laboratory, National Cancer Institute-Frederick Cancer Research and Development Center, Frederick, Md. [ 3 H] RTX may also be obtained from commercial vendors (e.g., Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Inc.; Piscataway, N.J.).
  • the membrane homogenate of Example 4 is centrifuged as before and resuspended to a protein concentration of 333 ⁇ g/ml in homogenization buffer. Binding assay mixtures are set up on ice and contain [ 3 H]RTX (specific activity 2200 mCi/ml), 2 ⁇ l non-radioactive test compound, 0.25 mg/ml bovine serum albumin (Cohn fraction V), and 5 ⁇ 10 4 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 10 5 VR1-transfected cells. The final volume is adjusted to 500 ⁇ l (for competition binding assays) or 1,000 ⁇ l (for saturation binding assays) with the ice-cold HEPES homogenization buffer solution (pH 7.4) described above.
  • Non-specific binding is defined as that occurring in the presence of 1 ⁇ M non-radioactive RTX (Alexis Corp.; San Diego, Calif.).
  • RTX non-radioactive RTX
  • [ 3 H]RTX is added in the concentration range of 7-1,000 pM, using 1 to 2 dilutions. Typically 11 concentration points are collected per saturation binding curve.
  • Equilibrium binding parameters are determined by fitting the allosteric Hill equation to the measured values with the aid of the computer program FIT P (Biosoft, Ferguson, Mo.) as described by Szallasi, et al. (1993) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 266:678-683.
  • Compounds provided herein generally exhibit K i values for capsaicin receptor of less than 1 ⁇ M, 100 nM, 50 nM, 25 nM, 10 nM, or 1 nM in this assay.
  • This Example illustrates a representative calcium mobilization assay for use in monitoring the response of cells expressing capsaicin receptor to capsaicin and other vanilloid ligands of the capsaicin receptor, as well as for evaluating test compounds for agonist and antagonist activity.
  • the culture medium is emptied from the 96 well plates and FLUO-3 AM calcium sensitive dye (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.) is added to each well (dye solution: 1 mg FLUO-3 AM, 440 ⁇ L DMSO and 440 ⁇ l 20% pluronic acid in DMSO, diluted 1:250 in Krebs-Ringer HEPES (KRH) buffer (25 mM HEPES, 5 mM KCl, 0.96 mM NaH 2 PO 4 , 1 mM MgSO 4 , 2 mM CaCl 2 , 5 mM glucose, 1 mM probenecid, pH 7.4), 501 diluted solution per well). Plates are covered with aluminum foil and incubated at 37° C. for 1-2 hours in an environment containing 5% CO 2 . After the incubation, the dye is emptied from the plates, and the cells are washed once with KRH buffer, and resuspended in KRH buffer.
  • KRH Krebs-Ringer
  • Agonist e.g., olvanil, capsaicin, or RTX
  • FLUOROSKAN ASCENT Labsystems, Franklin, Mass.
  • FLIPR fluorometric imaging plate reader system, Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, Calif.
  • Varying concentrations of the antagonists ruthenium red or capsazepine (RBI; Natick, Mass.) are added to cells concurrently with agonist (e.g., 25-50 nM capsaicin).
  • agonist e.g., 25-50 nM capsaicin
  • y is the maximum fluorescence signal
  • x is the concentration of the agonist or antagonist
  • a is the E max
  • b corresponds to the IC 50 value
  • c is the Hill coefficient.
  • capsaicin IC 50 of capsaicin is first determined. An additional 20 ⁇ l of KRH buffer and 1 ⁇ l DMSO is added to each well of cells, prepared as described above. 100 ⁇ l capsaicin in KRH buffer is automatically transferred by the FLIPR instrument to each well. An 8-point concentration response curve, with final capsaicin concentrations of 1 nM to 3 ⁇ M, is used to determine capsaicin IC 50 .
  • Test compounds are dissolved in DMSO, diluted in 20 ⁇ l KRH buffer so that the final concentration of test compounds in the assay well is between 1 ⁇ M and 5 ⁇ M, and added to cells prepared as described above.
  • the 96 well plates containing prepared cells and test compounds are incubated in the dark, at room temperature for 0.5 to 6 hours. It is important that the incubation not continue beyond 6 hours.
  • 100 ⁇ l capsaicin in KRH buffer at twice the IC 50 concentration determined from the concentration response curve is automatically added by the FLIPR instrument to each well of the 96 well plate for a final sample volume of 200 ⁇ l and a final capsaicin concentration equal to the IC 50 .
  • the final concentration of test compounds in the assay wells is between 1 ⁇ M and 5 ⁇ M.
  • Antagonists of the capsaicin receptor decrease this response by at least about 20%, preferably by at least about 50%, and most preferably by at least 80% as compared to matched control.
  • the concentration of antagonist required to provide a 50% decrease is the IC 50 for the antagonist, and is preferably below 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar.
  • the ability of a compound to act as an agonist of the capsaicin receptor is determined by measuring the fluorescence response of cells expressing capsaicin receptors, using the methods described above, in the absence of capsaicin, RTX, or other capsaicin receptor agonists.
  • Compounds that cause cells to exhibit fluorescence above background are capsaicin receptor agonists.
  • Certain preferred compounds of the present invention are antagonists that are essentially free of agonist activity as demonstrated by the absence of detectable agonist activity in such an assay at compound concentrations below 4 nM, more preferably at concentrations below 10 ⁇ M and most preferably at concentrations less than or equal to 100 ⁇ M.
  • This Example illustrates the evaluation of compound half-life values (t 1/2 values) using a representative liver microsomal half-life assay.
  • liver microsomes are obtained from XenoTech LLC, 3800 Cambridge St., Kansas City, Kans. 66103 (catalog #H0610). Such liver microsomes may also be obtained from In Vitro Technologies (Baltimore, Md.) or Tissue Transformation Technologies (Edison, N.J.). Six test reactions are prepared, each containing 25 ⁇ L microsomes, 5 ⁇ L of a 100 ⁇ M solution of test compound, and 399 ⁇ L 0.1 M phosphate buffer (19 mL 0.1 M NaH 2 PO 4 , 81 mL 0.1 M Na 2 HPO 4 , adjusted to pH 7.4 with H 3 PO 4 ).
  • a seventh reaction is prepared as a positive control containing 25 ⁇ L microsomes, 399 ⁇ L 0.1 M phosphate buffer, and 5 ⁇ L of a 100 ⁇ M solution of a compound with known metabolic properties (e.g., DIAZEPAM or CLOZAPINE). Reactions are preincubated at 39° C. for 10 minutes.
  • a compound with known metabolic properties e.g., DIAZEPAM or CLOZAPINE
  • CoFactor Mixture is prepared by diluting 16.2 mg NADP and 45.4 mg Glucose-6-phosphate in 4 mL 100 mM MgCl 2 .
  • Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase solution is prepared by diluting 214.3 ⁇ L glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase suspension (Boehringer-Manheim catalog no. 0737224, distributed by Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Indianapolis, Ind.) into 1285.7 ⁇ L distilled water.
  • 71 ⁇ L Starting Reaction Mixture (3 mL CoFactor Mixture; 1.2 mL Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase solution) is added to 5 of the 6 test reactions and to the positive control.
  • 71 ⁇ L 100 mM MgCl 2 is added to the sixth test reaction, which is used as a negative control.
  • 75 ⁇ L of each reaction mix is pipetted into a well of a 96-well deep-well plate containing 75 ⁇ L ice-cold acetonitrile.
  • Samples are vortexed and centrifuged 10 minutes at 3500 rpm (Sorval T 6000D centrifuge, H1000B rotor).
  • 75 ⁇ L of supernatant from each reaction is transferred to a well of a 96-well plate containing 150 ⁇ L of a 0.5 ⁇ M solution of a compound with a known LCMS profile (internal standard) per well.
  • LCMS analysis of each sample is carried out and the amount of unmetabolized test compound is measured as AUC, compound concentration vs. time is plotted, and the t 1/2 value of the test compound is extrapolated.
  • Preferred compounds of the present invention exhibit in vitro t 1/2 values of greater than 10 minutes and less than 4 hours, preferably between 30 minutes and 1 hour, in human liver microsomes.
  • This Example illustrates the evaluation of compound toxicity using a Madin Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cell cytotoxicity assay.
  • test compound 1 ⁇ L is added to each well of a clear bottom 96-well plate (PACKARD, Meriden, Conn.) to give final concentration of compound in the assay of 10 micromolar, 100 micromolar or 200 micromolar. Solvent without test compound is added to control wells.
  • MDCK cells ATCC no. CCL-34 (American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Va.), are maintained in sterile conditions following the instructions in the ATCC production information sheet.
  • Confluent MDCK cells are trypsinized, harvested, and diluted to a concentration of 0.1 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml with warm (37° C.) medium (VITACELL Minimum Essential Medium Eagle, ATCC catalog #30-2003). 100 ⁇ L of diluted cells is added to each well, except for five standard curve control wells that contain 100 ⁇ L of warm medium without cells. The plate is then incubated at 37° C. under 95% O 2 , 5% CO 2 for 2 hours with constant shaking. After incubation, 50 ⁇ L of mammalian cell lysis solution is added per well, the wells are covered with PACKARD TOPSEAL stickers, and plates are shaken at approximately 700 rpm on a suitable shaker for 2 minutes.
  • PACKARD (Meriden, Conn.) ATP-LITE-M Luminescent ATP detection kit, product no. 6016941, is generally used according to the manufacturer's instructions to measure ATP production in treated and untreated MDCK cells.
  • PACKARD ATP LITE-M reagents are allowed to equilibrate to room temperature. Once equilibrated, the lyophilized substrate solution is reconstituted in 5.5 mls of substrate buffer solution (from kit). Lyophilized ATP standard solution is reconstituted in deionized water to give a 10 mM stock.
  • PACKARD substrate solution 50 ⁇ L is added to all wells, which are then covered, and the plates are shaken at approximately 700 rpm on a suitable shaker for 2 minutes.
  • a white PACKARD sticker is attached to the bottom of each plate and samples are dark adapted by wrapping plates in foil and placing in the dark for 10 minutes. Luminescence is then measured at 22° C.
  • ATP levels in cells treated with test compound(s) are compared to the levels determined for untreated cells.
  • Cells treated with 10 ⁇ M of a preferred test compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80%, preferably at least 90%, of the untreated cells.
  • ATP levels that are at least 50%, preferably at least 80%, of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • This Example illustrates a representative dorsal root ganglian cell assay for evaluating VR1 antagonist activity of a compound.
  • DRG are dissected from neonatal rats, dissociated and cultured using standard methods (Aguayo and White (1992) Brain Research 570:61-67). After 48 hour incubation, cells are washed once and incubated for 30-60 minutes with the calcium sensitive dye Fluo 4 AM (2.5-10 ug/ml; TefLabs, Austin, Tex.). Cells are then washed once, and various concentrations of compound is added to the cells. Addition of capsaicin to the cells results in a VR1-dependent increase in intracellular calcium levels which is monitored by a change in Fluo-4 fluorescence with a fluorometer. Data are collected for 60-180 seconds to determine the maximum fluorescent signal.
  • Fluorescent signal is then plotted as a function of compound concentration to identify the concentration required to achieve a 50% inhibition of the capsaicin-activated response, or IC 50 .
  • Antagonists of the capsaicin receptor preferably have an IC 50 below 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar.
  • This Example illustrates representative methods for assessing the degree of pain relief provided by a compound.
  • the following methods may be used to assess pain relief.
  • Compounds are effective in reversing or preventing mechanical allodynia-like symptoms if rats treated with such compounds require stimulation with a Von Frey filament of higher rigidity strength to provoke a positive allodynic response as compared to control untreated or vehicle treated rats.
  • testing of an animal in chronic pain may be done before and after compound administration.
  • an effective compound results in an increase in the rigidity of the filament needed to induce a response after treatment, as compared to the filament that induces a response before treatment or in an animal that is also in chronic pain but is left untreated or is treated with vehicle.
  • Test compounds are administered before or after onset of pain. When a test compound is administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
  • Test compound produces a reduction in mechanical hyperalgesia if there is a statistically significant decrease in the duration of hindpaw withdrawal.
  • Test compound may be administered before or after onset of pain. For compounds administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
  • Thermal hyperalgesia an exaggerated response to noxious thermal stimulus
  • Test compound produces a reduction in thermal hyperalgesia if there is a statistically significant increase in the time to hindpaw withdrawal (i.e., the thermal threshold to response or latency is increased).
  • Test compound may be administered before or after onset of pain. For compounds administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
  • Pain may be induced using any of the following methods, to allow testing of analgesic efficacy of a compound.
  • compounds provided herein result in a statistically significant reduction in pain as determined by at least one of the previously described testing methods, using male SD rats and at least one of the following models.
  • Acute inflammatory pain is induced using the carrageenan model essentially as described by Field et al. (1997) Br. J. Pharmacol. 121(8):1513-1522. 100-200 ⁇ l of 1-2% carrageenan solution is injected into the rats' hind paw. Three to four hours following injection, the animals' sensitivity to thermal and mechanical stimuli is tested using the methods described above.
  • a test compound (0.01 to 50 mg/kg) is administered to the animal, prior to testing, or prior to injection of carrageenan. The compound can be administered orally or through any parenteral route, or topically on the paw. Compounds that relieve pain in this model result in a statistically significant reduction in mechanical allodynia and/or thermal hyperalgesia.
  • Chronic inflammatory pain is induced using one of the following protocols:
  • rats are tested for thermal hyperalgesia, mechanical allodynia and mechanical hyperalgesia as described above.
  • rats are tested on days 5,6, and 7 following CFA injection.
  • animals are treated with a test compound, morphine or vehicle.
  • An oral dose of morphine of 1-5 mg/kg is suitable as positive control.
  • a dose of 0.01-50 mg/kg of test compound is used.
  • Compounds can be administered as a single bolus prior to testing or once or twice or three times daily, for several days prior to testing. Drugs are administered orally or through any parenteral route, or applied topically to the animal.
  • MPE Percent Maximum Potential Efficacy
  • Chronic neuropathic pain is induced using the chronic constriction injury (CCI) to the rat's sciatic nerve essentially as described by Bennett and Xie (1988) Pain 33:87-107.
  • Rats are anesthetized (e.g. with an intraperitoneal dose of 50-65 mg/kg pentobarbital with additional doses administered as needed).
  • the lateral aspect of each hind limb is shaved and disinfected.
  • aseptic technique an incision is made on the lateral aspect of the hind limb at the mid thigh level.
  • the biceps femoris is bluntly dissected and the sciatic nerve is exposed.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Child & Adolescent Psychology (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Quinoline Compounds (AREA)
  • Investigating Or Analysing Biological Materials (AREA)

Abstract

Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues are provided. Such compounds are ligands that may be used to modulate specific receptor activity in vivo or in vitro, and are particularly useful in the treatment of conditions associated with pathological receptor activation in humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock animals. Pharmaceutical compositions and methods for using them to treat such disorders are provided, as are methods for using such ligands for receptor localization studies.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/891,832, now allowed, filed Jul. 14, 2004, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/486,948, filed Jul. 14, 2003. The contents of each of these applications are incorporated herein in their entirety.
    • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • This invention relates generally to substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues that have useful pharmacological properties. The invention further relates to the use of such compounds for treating conditions related to capsaicin receptor activation, for identifying other agents that bind to capsaicin receptor, and as probes for the detection and localization of capsaicin receptors.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Pain perception, or nociception, is mediated by the peripheral terminals of a group of specialized sensory neurons, termed “nociceptors.” A wide variety of physical and chemical stimuli induce activation of such neurons in mammals, leading to recognition of a potentially harmful stimulus. Inappropriate or excessive activation of nociceptors, however, can result in debilitating acute or chronic pain.
  • Neuropathic pain involves pain signal transmission in the absence of stimulus, and typically results from damage to the nervous system. In most instances, such pain is thought to occur because of sensitization in the peripheral and central nervous systems following initial damage to the peripheral system (e.g., via direct injury or systemic disease). Neuropathic pain is typically burning, shooting and unrelenting in its intensity and can sometimes be more debilitating that the initial injury or disease process that induced it.
  • Existing treatments for neuropathic pain are largely ineffective. Opiates, such as morphine, are potent analgesics, but their usefulness is limited because of adverse side effects, such as physical addictiveness and withdrawal properties, as well as respiratory depression, mood changes, and decreased intestinal motility with concomitant constipation, nausea, vomiting, and alterations in the endocrine and autonomic nervous systems. In addition, neuropathic pain is frequently non-responsive or only partially responsive to conventional opioid analgesic regimens. Treatments employing the N-methyl-D-aspartate antagonist ketamine or the alpha(2)-adrenergic agonist clonidine can reduce acute or chronic pain, and permit a reduction in opioid consumption, but these agents are often poorly tolerated due to side effects.
  • Topical treatment with capsaicin has been used to treat chronic and acute pain, including neuropathic pain. Capsaicin is a pungent substance derived from the plants of the Solanaceae family (which includes hot chili peppers) and appears to act selectively on the small diameter afferent nerve fibers (A-delta and C fibers) that are believed to mediate pain. The response to capsaicin is characterized by persistent activation of nociceptors in peripheral tissues, followed by eventual desensitization of peripheral nociceptors to one or more stimuli. From studies in animals, capsaicin appears to trigger C fiber membrane depolarization by opening cation selective channels for calcium and sodium.
  • Similar responses are also evoked by structural analogues of capsaicin that share a common vanilloid moiety. One such analogue is resiniferatoxin (RTX), a natural product of Euphorbia plants. The term vanilloid receptor (VR) was coined to describe the neuronal membrane recognition site for capsaicin and such related irritant compounds. The capsaicin response is competitively inhibited (and thereby antagonized) by another capsaicin analog, capsazepine, and is also inhibited by the non-selective cation channel blocker ruthenium red. These antagonists bind to VR with no more than moderate affinity (typically with Ki values of no lower than 140 μM).
  • Rat and human vanilloid receptors have been cloned from dorsal root ganglion cells. The first type of vanilloid receptor to be identified is known as vanilloid receptor type 1 (VR1), and the terms “VR1” and “capsaicin receptor” are used interchangeably herein to refer to rat and/or human receptors of this type, as well as mammalian homologues. The role of VR1 in pain sensation has been confirmed using mice lacking this receptor, which exhibit no vanilloid-evoked pain behavior, and impaired responses to heat and inflammation. VR1 is a nonselective cation channel with a threshold for opening that is lowered in response to elevated temperatures, low pH, and capsaicin receptor agonists. For example, the channel usually opens at temperatures higher than about 45° C. Opening of the capsaicin receptor channel is generally followed by the release of inflammatory peptides from neurons expressing the receptor and other nearby neurons, increasing the pain response. After initial activation by capsaicin, the capsaicin receptor undergoes a rapid desensitization via phosphorylation by cAMP-dependent protein kinase.
  • Because of their ability to desensitize nociceptors in peripheral tissues, VR1 agonist vanilloid compounds have been used as topical anesthetics. However, agonist application may itself cause burning pain, which limits this therapeutic use. Recently, it has been reported that VR1 antagonists, including nonvanilloid compounds, are also useful for the treatment of pain (see PCT International Application Publication Number WO 02/08221, which published Jan. 31, 2002).
  • Thus, compounds that interact with VR1, but do not elicit the initial painful sensation of VR1 agonist vanilloid compounds, are desirable for the treatment of chronic and acute pain, including neuropathic pain. Antagonists of this receptor are particularly desirable for the treatment of pain, as well as conditions such as tear gas exposure, itch and urinary tract conditions such as urinary incontinence and overactive bladder. The present invention fulfills this need, and provides further related advantages.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention provides substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues characterized by the formula:
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00001
  • as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such compounds. Within Formula I:
    • Y and Z are each independently N or CR1. In certain embodiments, Y and Z are independently N or CH; in further embodiments, at least one of Y and Z is N (i.e., Y is N, Z is N or both Y and Z are N). R1 is independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkoxy and mono- and di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino.
    • R2 is: (i) hydrogen, halogen or cyano;
      • (ii) a group of the formula —Rc-M-A-Ry, wherein:
        • Rc is C0-C3alkyl or is joined to Ry or Rz, to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
        • M is a single covalent bond, O, S, SO2, C(═O), OC(═O), C(═O)O, O—C(═O)O, C(═O)N(Rz), OC(═O)N(Rz), N(Rz)C(═O), N(Rz)SO2, SO2N(Rz) or N(Rz);
        • A is a single covalent bond or C1-C8alkyl substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from Rb; and
        • Ry and Rz, if present, are:
          • (a) independently hydrogen, C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, C2-C8alkenyl, a 4-to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, or joined to Rc, to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, wherein each non-hydrogen Ry and Rz is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb; or
          • (b) joined to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb; or
      • (iii) taken together with R7 to form a fused 5- to 7-membered ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from oxo and C1-C4alkyl.
        In certain embodiments, R2 is not —NH2.
    • R7 is hydrogen, COOH, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl or taken together with R2 to form a fused, optionally substituted ring.
    • Ar1 is phenyl or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted ortho to the point of attachment with 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from groups of the formula LRa.
    • Ar2 is 6- to 10-membered aryl or 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from oxo and groups of the formula LRa. Within certain compounds of Formula I, Ar2 is a 5- to 10-membered aromatic heterocycle that is optionally substituted as described above. Within further such compounds, Ar2 of Formula I is phenyl or a 6-membered aromatic heterocycle, optionally substituted as described above.
    • L is independently selected at each occurrence from a single covalent bond, O, C(═O), OC(═O), C(═O)O, OC(═O)O, S(O)m, N(Rx), C(═O)N(Rx), N(Rx)C(═O), N(Rx)S(O)m, S(O)mN(Rx) and N[S(O)mRw]S(O)m; wherein m is independently selected at each occurrence from 0, 1 and 2; Rx is independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyl and C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; and Rw is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl.
    • Ra is independently selected at each occurrence from:
      • (i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano and nitro; and
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)amino and (3- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C6alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently selected from Rb.
    • Rb is independently chosen at each occurrence from hydroxy, halogen, amino, aminocarbonyl, cyano, nitro, oxo, COOH, C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkanoyl, C1-C8alkanoyloxy, C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C8alkyl ether, C1-C8hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, phenylC0-C8alkyl, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C8alkylsulfonyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C8alkyl.
  • Within certain aspects, compounds of Formula I are VR1 modulators and exhibit a Ki of no greater than 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar in a capsaicin receptor binding assay and/or have an EC50 or IC50 value of no greater than 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar in an assay for determination of capsaicin receptor agonist or antagonist activity.
  • In certain embodiments, VR1 modulators as described herein are VR1 antagonists and exhibit no detectable agonist activity in an in vitro assay of capsaicin receptor activation.
  • Within certain aspects, compounds as described herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
  • The present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound as described herein (i.e., a compound as provided herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof) in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • Within further aspects, methods are provided for reducing calcium conductance of a cellular capsaicin receptor, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., neuronal) expressing a capsaicin receptor with a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein. Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro.
  • Methods are further provided for inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to a capsaicin receptor. Within certain such aspects, the inhibition takes place in vitro. Such methods comprise contacting a capsaicin receptor with at least one VR1 modulator as described herein, under conditions and in an amount sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to the capsaicin receptor. Within other such aspects, the capsaicin receptor is in a patient. Such methods comprise contacting cells expressing a capsaicin receptor in a patient with at least one VR1 modulator as described herein in an amount sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to cells expressing a cloned capsaicin receptor in vitro, and thereby inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to the capsaicin receptor in the patient.
  • The present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein.
  • Within other aspects, methods are provided for treating pain in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from pain a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for treating itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, cough and/or hiccup in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from one or more of the foregoing conditions a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein.
  • The present invention further provides methods for promoting weight loss in an obese patient, comprising administering to an obese patient a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for identifying an agent that binds to capsaicin receptor, comprising: (a) contacting capsaicin receptor with a labeled VR1 modulator as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the VR1 modulator to capsaicin receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled VR1 modulator; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled VR1 modulator in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled VR1 modulator with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled VR1 modulator in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b), and therefrom identifying an agent that binds to capsaicin receptor.
  • Within further aspects, the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of capsaicin receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a VR1 modulator as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the VR1 modulator to capsaicin receptor; and (b) detecting a level of the VR1 modulator bound to capsaicin receptor.
  • The present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation, such as pain, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, cough, hiccup and/or obesity.
  • In yet another aspect, the present invention provides methods of preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
  • These and other aspects of the invention will become apparent upon reference to the following detailed description.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • As noted above, the present invention provides substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues. Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, to modulate (preferably inhibit) capsaicin receptor activity in a variety of contexts.
    • Terminology
  • Compounds are generally described herein using standard nomenclature. For compounds having asymmetric centers, it should be understood that (unless otherwise specified) all of the optical isomers and mixtures thereof are encompassed. In addition, compounds with carbon-carbon double bonds may occur in Z- and E-forms, with all isomeric forms of the compounds being included in the present invention unless otherwise specified. Where a compound exists in various tautomeric forms, a recited compound is not limited to any one specific tautomer, but rather is intended to encompass all tautomeric forms. Certain compounds are described herein using a general formula that includes variables (e.g., R3, A1, X). Unless otherwise specified, each variable within such a formula is defined independently of any other variable, and any variable that occurs more than one time in a formula is defined independently at each occurrence.
  • The term “quinolin-4-ylamine analogue,” as used herein, encompasses all compounds of Formula I as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such compounds. Such compounds include analogues in which the quinoline core is modified by the addition of ring nitrogen atoms, as well as analogues in which varied substituents, as described in more detail below, are attached to such a core structure. In other words, compounds that are quinolin-4-ylamines, [1,8]naphthyridin-4-ylamines, [1,5]naphthyridin-4-ylamines and pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-ylamines are within the scope of quinolin-4-ylamine analogues.
  • A “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is generally considered in the art to be suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication. Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids. Specific pharmaceutical salts include, but are not limited to, salts of acids such as hydrochloric, phosphoric, hydrobromic, malic, glycolic, fumaric, sulfuric, sulfamic, sulfanilic, formic, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, benzene sulfonic, ethane disulfonic, 2-hydroxyethylsulfonic, nitric, benzoic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, citric, tartaric, lactic, stearic, salicylic, glutamic, ascorbic, pamoic, succinic, fumaric, maleic, propionic, hydroxymaleic, hydroiodic, phenylacetic, alkanoic such as acetic, HOOC—(CH2)n—COOH where n is 0-4, and the like. Similarly, pharmaceutically acceptable cations include, but are not limited to sodium, potassium, calcium, aluminum, lithium and ammonium. Those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize further pharmaceutically acceptable salts for the compounds provided herein, including those listed by Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., p. 1418 (1985). In general, a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method. Briefly, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
  • It will be apparent that each compound of Formula I may, but need not, be formulated as a hydrate, solvate or non-covalent complex. In addition, the various crystal forms and polymorphs are within the scope of the present invention. Also provided herein are prodrugs of the compounds of Formula I. A “prodrug” is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound of Formula I, or other formula provided herein. For example, a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein. Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein. Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved to the parent compounds.
  • As used herein, the term “alkyl” refers to a straight or branched chain or cyclic saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon. Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (C1-C8alkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (C1-C6alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (C1-C4alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl, 3-methylpentyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl and norbornyl. “C0-C4alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond (C0) or an alkyl group having 1, 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms; “C0-C6alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a C1-C6alkyl group; “C0-C8alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a C1-C8alkyl group. In certain embodiments, preferred alkyl groups are straight or branched chain. In some instances herein, a substituent of an alkyl group is specifically indicated. For example, “C1-C6Cyanoalkyl” refers to a C1-C6alkyl group that has at least one CN substituent. One representative branched cyanoalkyl group is —C(CH3)2CN. Similarly, “C1-C6hydroxyalkyl” refers to a C1-C6alkyl group that has at least one —OH substituent.
  • Similarly, “alkenyl” refers to straight or branched chain or cyclic alkene groups, in which at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond is present. Alkenyl groups include C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C6alkenyl and C2-C4alkenyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl. “Alkynyl” refers to straight or branched chain or cyclic alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond. Alkynyl groups include C2-C8alkynyl, C2-C6alkynyl and C2-C4alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. In certain embodiments, preferred alkenyl and alkynyl groups are straight or branched chain.
  • By “alkoxy,” as used herein, is meant an alkyl group as described above attached via an oxygen bridge. Alkoxy groups include C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C4alkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3-methylpentoxy are specific alkoxy groups.
  • Similarly, “alkylthio” refers to an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge. Preferred alkoxy and alkylthio groups are those in which an alkyl group is attached via the heteroatom bridge.
  • The term “oxo,” as used herein, refers to a keto (C═O) group. An oxo group that is a substituent of a nonaromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of —CH2— to —C(═O)—.
  • The term “alkanoyl” refers to an acyl group in a linear or branched arrangement (e.g., —(C═O)-alkyl), where attachment is through the carbon of the keto group. Alkanoyl groups include C2-C8alkanoyl, C2-C6alkanoyl and C2-C4alkanoyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. “C1alkanoyl” refers to —(C═O)—H, which (along with C2-C8alkanoyl) is encompassed by the term “C1-C8alkanoyl.” Ethanoyl is C2alkanoyl.
  • An “alkanone” is a ketone group in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement. “C3-C8alkanone,” “C3-C6alkanone” and “C3-C4alkanone” refer to an alkanone having from 3 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively. By way of example, a C3 alkanone group has the structure —CH2—(C═O)—CH3.
  • Similarly, “alkyl ether” refers to a linear or branched ether substituent. Alkyl ether groups include C2-C8alkyl ether, C2-C6alkyl ether and C2-C4alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively. By way of example, a C2 alkyl ether group has the structure —CH2—O—CH3.
  • The term “alkoxycarbonyl” refers to an alkoxy group linked via a carbonyl (i.e., a group having the general structure —C(═O)—O-alkyl). Alkoxycarbonyl groups include C2-C8, C2-C6 and C2-C4alkoxycarbonyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively. “C1alkoxycarbonyl” refers to —C(═O)—OH, which is encompassed by the term “C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl.” “Methoxycarbonyl” refers to C(═O)—OCH3.
  • “Alkanoyloxy,” as used herein, refers to an alkanoyl group linked via an oxygen bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure —O—C(═O)-alkyl). Alkanoyloxy groups include C2-C8, C2-C6 and C2-C4alkanoyloxy groups, which have from 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • “Alkylsulfonyl” refers to groups of the formula —(SO2)-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include C1-C6alkylsulfonyl and C1-C4alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methylsulfonyl is one representative alkylsulfonyl group.
  • “Alkylamino” refers to a secondary or tertiary amine having the general structure —NH-alkyl or —N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each alkyl may be the same or different. Such groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)amino groups, in which each alkyl may be the same or different and may contain from 1 to 8 carbon atoms, as well as mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino groups and mono- and di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino groups.
  • “Alkylaminoalkyl” refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkyl group (i.e., a group having the general structure -alkyl-NH-alkyl or -alkyl-N(alkyl)(alkyl)) in which each alkyl is selected independently. Such groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)aminoC1-C8alkyl, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C6alkyl and mono- and di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, in which each alkyl may be the same or different. “Mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C6alkyl” refers to a mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino group linked via a direct bond or a C1-C6alkyl group. The following are representative alkylaminoalkyl groups:
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00002
  • The term “aminocarbonyl” refers to an amide group (i.e., —(C═O)NH2). “Mono- or di-(C1-C8alkyl)aminocarbonyl” is an aminocarbonyl group in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms is replaced with C1-C8alkyl. If both hydrogen atoms are so replaced, the C1-C8alkyl groups may be the same or different.
  • The term “halogen” refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • A “haloalkyl” is a branched, straight-chain or cyclic alkyl group, substituted with 1 or more halogen atoms (e.g., “C1-C8haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 8 carbon atoms; “C1-C6haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples of haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-1-trifluoromethyl-ethyl. Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl. The term “haloalkoxy” refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above attached via an oxygen bridge. “C1-C8haloalkoxy” groups have from 1 to 8 carbon atoms. “Haloalkylsulfonyl” refers to a haloalkyl group attached via a —SO2— bridge. “C1-C6haloalkylsulfonyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • A dash (“-”) that is not between two letters or symbols is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent. For example, —CONH2 is attached through the carbon atom.
  • A “heteroatom,” as used herein, is oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen.
  • A “carbocycle” or “carbocyclic group” comprises at least one ring formed entirely by carbon-carbon bonds (referred to herein as a carbocyclic ring), and does not contain a heterocyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, each carbocyclic ring within a carbocycle may be saturated, partially saturated or aromatic. A carbocycle generally has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings; carbocycles within certain embodiments have one ring or two fused rings. Typically, each ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members (i.e., C3-C8); C5-C7 rings are recited in certain embodiments. Carbocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members. Certain representative carbocycles are cycloalkyl (i.e., groups that comprise saturated and/or partially saturated rings, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, decahydro-naphthalenyl, octahydro-indenyl, and partially saturated variants of any of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl). Other carbocycles are aryl (i.e., contain at least one aromatic carbocyclic ring, with or without additional fused, pendant or spiro cyclolkyl rings). Such carbocycles include, for example, phenyl, naphthyl, fluorenyl, indanyl and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-naphthyl.
  • Certain carbocycles recited herein are C6-C10arylC0-C8alkyl groups (i.e., groups in which a carbocyclic group comprising at least one aromatic ring is linked via a direct bond or a C1-C8alkyl group). Such groups include, for example, phenyl and indanyl, as well as groups in which either of the foregoing is linked via C1-C8alkyl, preferably via C1-C4alkyl. Phenyl groups linked via a direct bond or alkyl group may be designated phenylC0-C8alkyl (e.g., benzyl, 1-phenyl-ethyl, 1-phenyl-propyl and 2-phenyl-ethyl). A phenylC0-C8alkoxy group is a phenyl ring linked via an oxygen bridge or an alkoxy group having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (e.g., phenoxy or benzoxy).
  • A “heterocycle” or “heterocyclic group” has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Typically, a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring. Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members. Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO2. Heterocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated. Unless otherwise specified, a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated) or a heteroaryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic). A heterocyclic group may generally be linked via any ring or substituent atom, provided that a stable compound results. N-linked heterocyclic groups are linked via a component nitrogen atom.
  • Heterocyclic groups include, for example, azepanyl, azocinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiofuranyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benztetrazolyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, cinnolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, dihydrofuro[2,3-b]tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydroisoquinolinyl, dihydrotetrahydrofuranyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]decyl, dithiazinyl, furanyl, furazanyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolyl, indazolyl, indolenyl, indolinyl, indolizinyl, indolyl, isobenzofuranyl, isochromanyl, isoindazolyl, isoindolinyl, isoindolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isoquinolinyl, morpholinyl, naphthyridinyl, octahydroisoquinolinyl, oxadiazolyl, oxazolidinyl, oxazolyl, phthalazinyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, piperidinyl, piperidonyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, pyranyl, pyrazinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyridoimidazolyl, pyridooxazolyl, pyridothiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolidonyl, pyrrolinyl, pyrrolyl, quinazolinyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinuclidinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrazolyl, thiadiazinyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolyl, thienothiazolyl, thienooxazolyl, thienoimidazolyl, thienyl, thiophenyl, thiomorpholinyl and variants thereof in which the sulfur atom is oxidized, triazinyl, and any of the foregoing that are substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents as described above.
  • Certain heterocyclic groups are 4- to 10-membered, 5- to 10-membered, 3- to 7-membered, 4- to 7-membered or 5- to 7-membered groups that contain 1 heterocyclic ring or 2 fused or spiro rings, optionally substituted. 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl groups include, for example, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, azepanyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, morpholino, thiomorpholino and 1,1-dioxo-thiomorpholin-4-yl. Such groups may be substituted as indicated. Representative aromatic heterocycles are azocinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl and 3,4-dihydro-1H-isoquinolin-2-yl. (C3-C10)heterocycloalkyls include, for example, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, azepanyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, morpholino, thiomorpholino, and 1,1-dioxo-thiomorpholin-4-yl, as well as groups in which each of the foregoing is substituted. Representative aromatic heterocycles are azocinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl and 3,4-dihydro-1H-isoquinolin-2-yl.
  • Additional heterocyclic groups include, for example, acridinyl, azepanyl, azocinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzotriazolylcarbazolyl, benztetrazolyl, NH-carbazolyl, carbolinyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, cinnolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, dihydrofuro[2,3-b]tetrahydrofuran, dihydroisoquinolinyl, dihydrotetrahydrofuranyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, dithiazinyl, furanyl, furazanyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolyl, indazolyl, indolenyl, indolinyl, indolizinyl, indolyl, isobenzofuranyl, isochromanyl, isoindazolyl, isoindolinyl, isoindolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isoquinolinyl, morpholinyl, naphthyridinyl, octahydroisoquinolinyl, oxadiazolyl, oxazolidinyl, oxazolyl, phenanthridinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxathiinyl, phenoxazinyl, phthalazinyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, piperidinyl, piperidonyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, pyranyl, pyrazinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyridoimidazolyl, pyridooxazolyl, pyridothiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolidonyl, pyrrolinyl, pyrrolyl, quinazolinyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinuclidinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrazolyl, thiadiazinyl, thiadiazolyl, thianthrenyl, thiazolyl, thienothiazolyl, thienooxazolyl, thienoimidazolyl, thienyl, thiophenyl, thiomorpholinyl and variants thereof in which the sulfur atom is oxidized, triazinyl, xanthenyl and any of the foregoing that are substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents as described above.
  • A “heterocycleC0-C8alkyl” is a heterocyclic group linked via a single covalent bond or C1-C8alkyl group. A (3- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C6alkyl is a heterocyclic group having from 3 to 10 ring members linked via a direct bond or a C1-C6alkyl group. A (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C8alkyl is a 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C8alkyl group; a (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl is a 4-to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl ring linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C4alkyl group. I
  • A “substituent,” as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest. For example, a “ring substituent” may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group discussed herein that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member. The term “substitution” refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent as described above, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
  • Groups that are “optionally substituted” are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different). Such optional substituents include, for example, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, nitro, C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C2-C8alkyl ether, C3-C8alkanone, C1-C8alkylthio, amino, mono- or di-(C1-C8alkyl)amino, C1-C8haloalkyl, C1-C8haloalkoxy, C1-C8alkanoyl, C2-C8alkanoyloxy, C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl,
  • —COOH, —CONH2, mono- or di-(C1-C8alkyl)aminocarbonyl, —SO2NH2, and/or mono or di(C1-C8alkyl)sulfonamido, as well as carbocyclic and heterocyclic groups. Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase “substituted with from 0 to X substituents,” where X is the maximum number of possible substituents. Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents (i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substitutents).
  • The terms “VR1” and “capsaicin receptor” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a type 1 vanilloid receptor. Unless otherwise specified, these terms encompass both rat and human VR1 receptors (e.g., GenBank Accession Numbers AF327067, AJ277028 and NM—018727; sequences of certain human VR1 cDNAs are provided in SEQ ID NOs:1-3, and the encoded amino acid sequences shown in SEQ ID NOs:4 and 5, of U.S. Pat. No. 6,482,611), as well as homologues thereof found in other species.
  • A “VR1 modulator,” also referred to herein as a “modulator,” is a compound that modulates VR1 activation and/or VR1-mediated signal transduction. VR1 modulators specifically provided herein are compounds of Formula I and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds of Formula I. A VR1 modulator may be a VR1 agonist or antagonist. A modulator binds with “high affinity” if the Ki at VR1 is less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar. A representative assay for determining Ki at VR1 is provided in Example 5, herein.
  • A modulator is considered an “antagonist” if it detectably inhibits vanilloid ligand binding to VR1 and/or VR1-mediated signal transduction (using, for example, the representative assay provided in Example 6); in general, such an antagonist inhibits VR1 activation with a IC50 value of less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 100 nanomolar, and more preferably less than 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 6. VR1 antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists. In certain embodiments, capsaicin receptor antagonists provided herein are not vanilloids.
  • An “inverse agonist” of VR1 is a compound that reduces the activity of VR1 below its basal activity level in the absence of added vanilloid ligand. Inverse agonists of VR1 may also inhibit the activity of vanilloid ligand at VR1, and/or may also inhibit binding of vanilloid ligand to VR1. The ability of a compound to inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand to VR1 may be measured by a binding assay, such as the binding assay given in Example 5. The basal activity of VR1, as well as the reduction in VR1 activity due to the presence of VR1 antagonist, may be determined from a calcium mobilization assay, such as the assay of Example 6.
  • A “neutral antagonist” of VR1 is a compound that inhibits the activity of vanilloid ligand at VR1, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a calcium mobilization assay as described in Example 6 performed in the absence of vanilloid ligand, VR1 activity is reduced by no more than 10%, more preferably by no more than 5%, and even more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity). Neutral antagonists of VR1 may inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand to VR1.
  • As used herein a “capsaicin receptor agonist” or “VR1 agonist” is a compound that elevates the activity of the receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor (i.e., enhances VR1 activation and/or VR1-mediated signal transduction). Capsaicin receptor agonist activity may be identified using the representative assay provided in Example 6. In general, such an agonist has an EC50 value of less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 100 nanomolar, and more preferably less than 10 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 6. In certain embodiments, capsaicin receptor agonists provided herein are not vanilloids.
  • A “vanilloid” is capsaicin or any capsaicin analogue that comprises a phenyl ring with two oxygen atoms bound to adjacent ring carbon atoms (one of which carbon atom is located para to the point of attachment of a third moiety that is bound to the phenyl ring). A vanilloid is a “vanilloid ligand” if it binds to VR1 with a Ki (determined as described herein) that is no greater than 10 μM. Vanilloid ligand agonists include capsaicin, olvanil, N-arachidonoyl-dopamine and resiniferatoxin (RTX). Vanilloid ligand antagonists include capsazepine and iodo-resiniferatoxin.
  • A “capsaicin receptor modulatory amount” is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, achieves a concentration of VR1 modulator at a capsaicin receptor within the patient that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to VR1 in vitro (using the assay provided in Example 5) and/or VR1-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 6). The capsaicin receptor may be present, or example, in a body fluid such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine.
  • A “therapeutically effective amount” is an amount that, upon administration, is sufficient to provide detectable patient relief from a condition being treated. Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms such as pain.
  • A “patient” is any individual treated with a compound (e.g., a VR1 modulator) as provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation (e.g., pain, exposure to vanilloid ligand, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, respiratory disorders, cough and/or hiccup), or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic).
    • Substituted Quinolin-4-Ylamine Analogues
  • As noted above, the present invention provides substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of pain (e.g., neuropathic or peripheral nerve-mediated pain); exposure to capsaicin; exposure to acid, heat, light, tear gas air pollutants, pepper spray or related agents; respiratory conditions such as asthma or chronic obstructive pulmonary disease; itch; urinary incontinence or overactive bladder; cough or hiccup; and/or obesity. Such compounds may also be used within in vitro assays (e.g., assays for receptor activity), as probes for detection and localization of VR1 and as standards in ligand binding and VR1-mediated signal transduction assays.
  • Certain compounds provided herein detectably modulate the binding of capsaicin to VR1 at nanomolar (i.e., submicromolar) concentrations, preferably at subnanomolar concentrations, more preferably at concentrations below 100 picomolar, 20 picomolar, 10 picomolar or 5 picomolar. Such modulators are preferably not vanilloids. Certain preferred modulators are VR1 antagonists and have no detectable agonist activity in the assay described in Example 6. Preferred VR1 modulators further bind with high affinity to VR1, and do not substantially inhibit activity of human EGF receptor tyrosine kinase.
  • Certain compounds further satisfy Formula II:
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00003
  • or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of such a compound, wherein:
    • At least one of Y and Z is N; and the other of Y and Z is N or CR1. In certain embodiments, Z is N (e.g., Z is N and Y is CH, or both Y and Z are N). In further embodiments, Y is N. R1 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkoxy or mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino; in certain embodiments, R1 is hydrogen, C1-C4alkyl or halo C1-C4alkyl, with hydrogen preferred.
    • R2 is: (i) hydrogen, halogen or cyano;
      • (ii) a group of the formula —Rc-M-A-Ry, wherein:
        • Rc is C0-C3alkyl or is joined to Ry or Rz, to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
        • M is a single covalent bond, O, S, SO2,
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00004
        • A is a single covalent bond or C1-C8alkyl substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from Rb; and
        • Ry and Rz, if present, are:
          • (a) independently hydrogen, C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, C2-C8alkenyl, a 4-to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, or joined to Rc to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, wherein each non-hydrogen Ry and Rz is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb; or
          • (b) joined to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
        • such that R2 is not —NH2; or
      • (iii) taken together with R7 to form a fused 5- to 7-membered ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from oxo and C1-C4alkyl.
  • It will be apparent that, within groups of the formula Rc-M-A-Ry, if two adjacent variables are bonds, then the two variables are taken together to form a single bond. For example, if Rc is C0alkyl and M and A are both single covalent bonds, then R2 is —Ry.
      • In certain compounds, R2 is: (i) hydrogen, hydroxy or halogen; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6-aminoalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C6haloalkyl. Representative R2 groups include hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, morpholinylC0-C2alkyl, piperazinylC0-C2alkyl, piperidinylC0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl and pyridylC0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl and C1-C6haloalkyl.
    • R7 is hydrogen, COOH, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl or taken together with R2 to form a fused, optionally substituted ring. In certain compounds, R7 is hydrogen.
    • Ar1 is phenyl or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted ortho to the point of attachment with 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from groups of the formula LRa. In other words, if Ar1 is mono-substituted phenyl, the substitution is at the 2-position; and if Ar1 is di-substituted phenyl, the substitutions are located at the 2- and 6-postions. Similarly, if Ar1 is substituted pyridin-2-yl, then the substitution is at the 3-position. Preferred Ar1 groups are phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or monosubstituted at the ortho position with halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy or C1-C6haloalkoxy. Particularly preferred groups are phenyl and pyridyl, optionally substituted as described above.
    • Ar2 is 6- to 10-membered aryl or 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from oxo and groups of the formula LRa. In certain embodiments, Ar2 is phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., a 6-membered heteroaryl), each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from (a) groups of the formula LRa and (b) groups that are taken together to form a fused, 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from Rb. Representative Ar2 groups include phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6haloalkylsulfonyl, amino, and mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino. Preferably, Ar2 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl that is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl. In certain such compounds, Ar1 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl; and Ar2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl.
    • L is independently selected at each occurrence from a single covalent bond, O, C(═O),
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00005
  • wherein m is independently selected at each occurrence from 0, 1 and 2; Rx is independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyl and C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; and Rw is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl;
    • Ra is independently selected at each occurrence from:
      • (i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano and nitro; and
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)amino and (3- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C6alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently selected from Rb; and
    • Rb is independently chosen at each occurrence from hydroxy, halogen, amino, aminocarbonyl, cyano, nitro, oxo, COOH, C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkanoyl, C1-C8alkanoyloxy, C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C8alkyl ether, C1-C8hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, phenylC0-C8alkyl, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C8alkylsulfonyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C8alkyl.
  • Within certain compounds of Formula II:
    • Ar1 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl;
    • Ar2 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl;
    • R2 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy or halogen; or
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6-aminoalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C6haloalkyl; and
    • R7 is hydrogen.
  • Certain compounds of Formula II further satisfy Formula IIa
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00006
  • wherein:
    • Ar2 is phenyl or a 6-membered aromatic heterocycle, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from groups of the formula LRa;
    • R2a is hydrogen, halogen or C1-C4alkyl;
      and the remaining variables are as described for Formula II.
  • Within Formula IIa, representative Ar2 groups include phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6haloalkylsulfonyl, amino, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino. Within certain embodiments, Ar2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl. Representative Ar1 groups are phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy or C1-C6haloalkoxy. In certain such compounds, Ar1 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl; and Ar2 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl.
  • Certain compounds of Formula I further satisfy Formula III
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00007
  • Within Formula III, Ar1, Y, Z, R2 and R7 are as described for Formula I; and Ar2 is 5-to 10-membered heteroaryl that substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from oxo and groups of the formula LRa, as described above for Formula I.
  • In certain compounds of Formula III, each R1 is hydrogen.
  • Within further compounds of Formula III, R2 is: (i) hydrogen, hydroxy or halogen; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6-aminoalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C6haloalkyl. Representative R2 groups include C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, morpholinylC0-C2alkyl, piperazinylC0-C2alkyl, piperidinylC0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl and pyridylC0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl and C1-C6haloalkyl.
  • Within certain compounds of Formula III, Ar2 is a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., a 6-membered heteroaryl) that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from (a) groups of the formula LRa and (b) groups that are taken together to form a fused, 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from Rb. Representative Ar2 groups include pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6haloalkylsulfonyl, amino, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino. Preferably, Ar2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl. Representative Ar1 groups include phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl and pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy or C1-C6haloalkoxy. In certain such compounds, Ar1 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl; and Ar2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl.
  • Within further compounds of Formula III:
    • Ar1 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl;
    • Ar2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl;
    • Y and Z are independently N or CH;
    • R2 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy or halogen; or
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6-aminoalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C6haloalkyl; and
    • R7 is hydrogen.
  • Certain compounds of Formula I further satisfy Formula IV
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00008
    • Within Formula IV:
  • R7, Y, Z, Ar1 and Ar2 are as described above for Formula I; and
    R2 is: (i) halogen or cyano;
      • (ii) a group of the formula —Rc-M-A-Ry, wherein:
        • R1 is C0-C3alkyl or is joined to Ry or Rz, to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
        • M is a single covalent bond, O, S, SO2, C(═O), OC(═O), C(═O)O, O—C(═O)O, C(═O)N(Rz), OC(═O)N(Rz), N(Rz)C(═O), N(Rz)SO2, SO2N(Rz) or N(Rz);
        • A is a single covalent bond or C1-C8alkyl substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from Rb; and
        • Ry and Rz, if present, are:
          • (a) independently hydrogen, C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, C2-C8alkenyl, a 4-to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, or joined to Rc to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, wherein each non-hydrogen Ry and Rz is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb; or
          • (b) joined to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
          • such that R2 is not —NH2; or
      • (iii) taken together with R7 to form a fused 5- to 7-membered ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from oxo and C1-C4alkyl.
  • Within certain compounds of Formula IV, R2 is: (i) hydroxy or halogen; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C6haloalkyl. Representative such R2 groups include C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, morpholinylC0-C2alkyl, piperazinylC0-C2alkyl, piperidinylC0-C2alkyl, phenylC0-C2alkyl and pyridylC0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl and C1-C6haloalkyl.
  • Within certain compounds of Formula IV:
    • Ar1 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl;
    • Ar2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl;
    • Y and Z are independently N or CH;
    • R2 is:
      • (i) hydroxy or halogen; or
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6aminoalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C6haloalkyl; and
    • R7 is hydrogen.
  • Certain compounds of Formula IV further satisfy Formula IVa
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00009
    • Within Formula IVa:
    • Ar1, Y and Z are as described for Formula IV;
    • Ar2 is phenyl or a 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from (a) groups of the formula LRa and (b) groups that are taken together to form a fused, 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from Rb;
    • R3 and R4 are:
      • (i) each independently selected from:
        • (a) hydrogen; and
        • (b) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C3-C8alkanone, C2-C8alkanoyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, C6-C10arylC0-C8alkyl, (5- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C8alkyl and C1-C8alkylsulfonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently selected from Rb; or
      • (ii) joined to form, with the N to which they are bound, a 4- to 10-membered heterocyclic group that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently selected from Rb;
    • R5 and R6 are, independently at each occurrence:
      • (i) each independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and C1-C6alkyl; or
      • (ii) taken together to form a keto group; and
    • n is 1, 2 or 3.
  • In certain compounds of Formula IVa, R3 and R4 are each independently: (i) hydrogen; or (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl or C1-C8alkylsulfonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, COOH, C1-C6alkyl, haloC1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy and haloC1-C6alkoxy. In other compounds of Formula IVa, R3 and R4 are joined to form azetidine, pyrrolidine, morpholine, piperidine or piperazine, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, COOH, C1-C6alkyl, haloC1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy and haloC1-C6alkoxy.
  • Within certain embodiments, R3 and R4 of Formula IVa are each independently selected from (i) hydrogen or (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C3-C8alkanone, C1-C8alkanoyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, C6-C10arylC0-C8alkyl, 5- to 10-membered heterocycleC0-C8alkyl and —(SO2)C1-C8alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. Within other embodiments, R3 and R4 are each independently selected from (i) hydrogen and (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl, indanylC0-C4alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroarylC0-C4alkyl and 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, C1-C6alkyl, haloC1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy and haloC1-C6alkoxy. Representative such R3 and R4 groups include C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, 5- to 7-membered heterocycloC0-C4alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, indanyl, benzyl, 1-phenyl-ethyl, 1-phenyl-propyl and 2-phenyl-ethyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen and C1-C4alkyl. For example, at least one of R3 and R4 may be pyridylC0-C4alkyl, pyrimidylC0-C4alkyl, imidazolylC0-C4alkyl or tetrazolylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with 0, 1 or 2 substituents. Alternatively, R3 and/or R4 may be joined to an R5 or R6 group (along with the N to which R3 and R4 are bound and any carbon atoms between the N and R5 or R6) to form an optionally substituted heterocycle, such as a 5- to 10-membered mono- or bi-cyclic group.
  • Within other embodiments, R3 and/or R4 of Formula II may form an optionally substituted heterocycle. For example, R3 and R4 may be joined to form, with the N to which they are bound, an optionally substituted heterocycle; or R3 or R4 may be joined to an R5 or R6 moiety to from an optionally substituted heterocycle. In either case, the resulting heterocycle may be, for example, a 4- or 5- to 10-membered, mono- or bi-cyclic group substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents (e.g., from 1 to 4 substituents or 0, 1 or 2 substituents). In certain embodiments, each substituent is independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, C1-C4alkyl, haloC1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, haloC1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, heterocycleC0-C8alkyl and heterocycleC1-C8alkoxycarbonyl. In certain embodiments, such substituents are lower alkyl groups such as methyl and/or ethyl.
  • A heterocyclic group that comprises R3 and/or R4 may be a heteroaryl group, which comprises an aromatic ring (e.g., optionally substituted acridinyl, benzimidazolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, carbazolyl, cinnolinyl, indazolyl, indolinyl, indolyl, isoquinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, phenanthridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, phthalazinyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl or tetrahydroquinolinyl). One such heteroaryl is 3,4-dihydro-1H-isoquinolin-2-yl. Alternatively, the heterocycle may be an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl group, such as azepanyl, azocinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, 1,4-dioxa-8-aza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, morpholino, piperadinyl, piperazinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolinyl, thiomorpholino or 1,1-dioxo-thiomorpholin-4-yl. Representative heterocycles that may be formed from R3 and R4 include, but are not limited to, optionally substituted azepane, azocane, dihydroisoquinoline, imidazole, morpholine, octahydroquinoline, piperazine, piperidine and pyrrolidine. Representative heterocycles that may be formed from R3 or R4, in combination with an R5 or R6, include (but are not limited to) optionally substituted piperadine and pyrrolidine
  • R5 and R6 of Formula IVa, within certain embodiments, are independently (at each occurrence) hydrogen or optionally substituted C1-C6alkyl; in addition, or alternatively, any R5 or R6 may be joined with any other R5 or R6 to form an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, or (as discussed above) joined with R3 or R4 to form an optionally substituted heterocycle. In certain embodiments, each R5 and R6 is C1-C2alkyl or hydrogen. n may be 1, 2 or 3, with 1 preferred in certain embodiments.
  • Certain compounds of Formula IV further satisfy Formula IVb
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00010
    • Within Formula IVb:
  • Ar1, Ar2, Y and Z are as described for Formula IV;
    R3 is selected from:
      • (i) hydrogen; and
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C6-C10arylC0-C8alkyl, and 5- to 10-membered heterocycleC0-C8alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently selected from Rb;
        R5 and R6 are, independently at each occurrence:
  • (i) each independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and C1-C6alkyl; or
  • (ii) taken together to form a keto group; and
  • n is 1, 2 or 3.
  • In certain compounds of Formula IVb, R3 is: (i) hydrogen; or (ii) C1-C8alkyl substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, oxo, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy and mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino. Within certain such compounds:
    • Y and Z are independently N or CH;
    • Ar1 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl;
    • Ar2 is pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl;
    • Each R5 and R6 is independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C2alkyl; and
    • n is 1.
  • Within certain embodiments of Formula IVb, R3 is: (i) hydrogen or (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C3-C8alkanone, C2-C8alkyl ether, C6-C10arylC0-C8alkyl, or 5- to 10-membered heterocycleC0-C8alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted. Within other embodiments, R3 of Formula IV is (i) hydrogen or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, phenylC0-C4alkyl, 5- to 6-membered heteroarylC0-C4alkyl, or 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen, amino, C1-C6alkyl, haloC1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy and haloC1-C6alkoxy. Representative R3 groups include hydrogen, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkyl ether and benzyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from hydroxy, halogen and C1-C4alkyl. Alternatively, R3 may be joined to an R5 or R6 group (along with the 0 to which R3 is bound and any carbon atoms between the O and R5 or R6) to form an optionally substituted heterocycle, such as a 5- to 10-membered mono- or bi-cyclic group. The resulting heterocycle may, for example, be substituted with from 0 to 4 (e.g., 0, 1 or 2) substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, C1-C4alkyl, haloC1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, haloC1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, heterocycleC0-C8alkyl and heterocycleC1-C8alkoxycarbonyl.
  • R5 and R6, within certain embodiments of Formula III, are independently (at each occurrence) hydrogen or optionally substituted C1-C6alkyl; in addition, or alternatively, any R5 or R6 may be joined with any other R5 or R6 to form an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, or (as discussed above) joined with R3 to form an optionally substituted heterocycle. In certain embodiments, each R5 and R6 is C1-C2alkyl or hydrogen. n may be 1, 2 or 3, with 1 preferred in certain embodiments.
  • In certain embodiments of the Formulas provided herein, R2 is hydrogen, amino, hydroxy, halogen, or optionally substituted —(CH2)nNH2, —(CH2)nNH(C1-C8alkyl), —(CH2)nN(C1-C8alkyl)2, —(CH2)n(5- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl), —(CH2)nOH or —(CH2)nO(C1-C8alkyl). Optionally substituted groups include, for example, unsubstituted groups and groups substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl, and haloC1-C6alkyl. Heterocycloalkyl groups include those in which the heterocycloalkyl comprises a nitrogen or oxygen atom directly linked to the —(CH2)n.
  • In certain embodiments of the Formulas provided herein, Ar1 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 substituents as described above; preferably such substituents, if any, are independently selected from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl, haloC1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy and haloC1-C6alkoxy. For example, Ar1 may have one substituent selected from halogen, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, haloC1-C6alkyl and haloC1-C6alkoxy. Ar1 groups include, but are not limited to, pyridin-2-yl, 3-methyl-pyridin-2-yl, 3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl and 3-halo-pyridin-2-yl.
  • Ar2, within certain embodiments of the formulas provided herein, is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 substituents as described above. In certain embodiments, one such substituent is located at the para position of a 6-membered Ar2. Optional Ar2 substituents are as described above and include, for example, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6haloalkylsulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonamide, C1-C6haloalkylsulfonamide, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and 3- to 10-membered heterocycles. Preferred Ar2 substituents include C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4halolkyl and groups of the formula —(SO2)Ra, wherein Ra is C1-C4alkyl or haloC1-C4alkyl. Ar2 groups include phenyl, pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl and thiadiazolyl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, haloC1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, haloC1-C6alkoxy, —SO2—Ra and —SO2NRx—Ra. Ar2 groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl, 2-pyridyl and 3-pyridyl, each of which is substituted at the para-position with halogen, cyano, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoro-1-methyl-ethyl, methanesulfonyl, ethanesulfonyl, propanesulfonyl, propane-2-sulfonyl, trifluoromethanesulfonyl or 2,2,2-trifluoroethanesulfonyl.
  • Representative compounds provided herein include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in Examples 1-3. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
  • Within certain aspects of the present invention, substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues provided herein detectably alter (modulate) VR1 activity, as determined using an in vitro VR1 functional assay such as a calcium mobilization assay, dorsal root ganglion assay or in vivo pain relief assay. As an initial screen for such activity, a VR1 ligand binding assay may be used. References herein to a “VR1 ligand binding assay” are intended to refer to a standard in vitro receptor binding assay such as that provided in Example 5, and a “calcium mobilization assay” (also referred to herein as a “signal transduction assay”) may be performed as described in Example 6. Briefly, to assess binding to VR1, a competition assay may be performed in which a VR1 preparation is incubated with labeled (e.g., 125I or 3H) compound that binds to VR1 (e.g., a capsaicin receptor agonist such as RTX) and unlabeled test compound. Within the assays provided herein, the VR1 used is preferably mammalian VR1, more preferably human or rat VR1. The receptor may be recombinantly expressed or naturally expressed. The VR1 preparation may be, for example, a membrane preparation from HEK293 or CHO cells that recombinantly express human VR1. Incubation with a compound that detectably modulates vanilloid ligand binding to VR1 results in a decrease or increase in the amount of label bound to the VR1 preparation, relative to the amount of label bound in the absence of the compound. This decrease or increase may be used to determine the Ki at VR1 as described herein. In general, compounds that decrease the amount of label bound to the VR1 preparation within such an assay are preferred.
  • As noted above, compounds that are VR1 antagonists are preferred within certain embodiments. IC50 values for such compounds may be determined using a standard in vitro VR1-mediated calcium mobilization assay, as provided in Example 6. Briefly, cells expressing capsaicin receptor are contacted with a compound of interest and with an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration (e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3 or Fura-2 (both of which are available, for example, from Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.), each of which produce a fluorescent signal when bound to Ca++). Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator in solution. Contact is maintained for an amount of time sufficient to allow the dye to enter the cells (e.g., 1-2 hours). Cells are washed or filtered to remove excess dye and are then contacted with a vanilloid receptor agonist (e.g., capsaicin, RTX or olvanil), typically at a concentration equal to the EC50 concentration, and a fluorescence response is measured. When agonist-contacted cells are contacted with a compound that is a VR1 antagonist the fluorescence response is generally reduced by at least 20%, preferably at least 50% and more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of test compound. The IC50 for VR1 antagonists provided herein is preferably less than 1 micromolar, less than 100 nM, less than 10 nM or less than 1 nM.
  • In other embodiments, compounds that are capsaicin receptor agonists are preferred. Capsaicin receptor agonist activity may generally be determined as described in Example 6. When cells are contacted with 1 micromolar of a compound that is a VR1 agonist, the fluorescence response is generally increased by an amount that is at least 30% of the increase observed when cells are contacted with 100 nM capsaicin. The EC50 for VR1 agonists provided herein is preferably less than 1 micromolar, less than 100 nM or less than 10 nM.
  • VR1 modulating activity may also, or alternatively, be assessed using a cultured dorsal root ganglion assay as provided in Example 9 and/or an in vivo pain relief assay as provided in Example 10. Compounds provided herein preferably have a statistically significant specific effect on VR1 activity within one or more functional assays provided herein.
  • Within certain embodiments, VR1 modulators provided herein do not substantially modulate ligand binding to other cell surface receptors, such as EGF receptor tyrosine kinase or the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor. In other words, such modulators do not substantially inhibit activity of a cell surface receptor such as the human epidermal growth factor (EGF) receptor tyrosine kinase or the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor (e.g., the IC50 or IC40 at such a receptor is preferably greater than 1 micromolar, and most preferably greater than 10 micromolar). Preferably, a modulator does not detectably inhibit EGF receptor activity or nicotinic acetylcholine receptor activity at a concentration of 0.5 micromolar, 1 micromolar or more preferably 10 micromolar. Assays for determining cell surface receptor activity are commercially available, and include the tyrosine kinase assay kits available from Panvera (Madison, Wis.).
  • Preferred compounds provided herein are non-sedating. In other words, a dose of compound that is twice the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia in an animal model for determining pain relief (such as a model provided in Example 10, herein) causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than ½ the time that pain relief lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al. (1988) Toxicology 49 (2-3):433-9). Preferably, a dose that is five times the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia does not produce statistically significant sedation. More preferably, a compound provided herein does not produce sedation at intravenous doses of less than 25 mg/kg (preferably less than 10 mg/kg) or at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
  • If desired, compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound to be achieved at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred VR1 modulator is nontoxic when a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred VR1 modulator produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred VR1 modulator exhibits an in vitro half-life that is equal to an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I.D. dosing, preferably T.I.D. dosing, more preferably B.I.D. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing). In addition, differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable for VR1 modulators used to treat pain by modulating CNS VR1 activity such that total daily oral doses as described above provide such modulation to a therapeutically effective extent, while low brain levels of VR1 modulators used to treat peripheral nerve mediated pain may be preferred (i.e., such doses do not provide brain (e.g., CSF) levels of the compound sufficient to significantly modulate VR1 activity). Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use. For example, assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers. Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously). Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays. Compound half-life is inversely proportional to the frequency of dosage of a compound. In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described within Example 7, herein.
  • As noted above, preferred compounds provided herein are nontoxic. In general, the term “nontoxic” as used herein shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans). In addition, a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, and (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
  • As used herein, a compound that “does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production” is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 8, herein. In other words, cells treated as described in Example 8 with 100 μM of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated compound that “does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals” is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of twice the minimum dose yielding a therapeutically effective in vivo concentration. In certain preferred embodiments, a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals. By “statistically significant” is meant results varying from control at the p<0.1 level or more preferably at the p<0.05 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
  • A compound “does not cause substantial liver enlargement” if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with twice the minimum dose that yields a therapeutically effective in vivo concentration results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g., dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally.
  • Similarly, a compound “does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes” if administration of twice the minimum dose yielding a therapeutically effective in vivo concentration does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory rodents by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. Alternatively, a compound “does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes” if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) equivalent to two-fold the minimum in vivo therapeutic concentration of the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the minimum in vivo therapeutic concentration of the compound.
  • In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the minimum therapeutically effective in vivo concentration.
  • Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal to the minimum therapeutically effective in vivo concentration. In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
  • For detection purposes, as discussed in more detail below, VR1 modulators provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled. For example, compounds recited in Formulas I-III may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2H, 3H, 11C, 13C, 14C, 15N, 18O, 17O, 31P, 32P, 35S, 18F and 36Cl. In addition, substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
    • Preparation of Substituted Quinolin-4-Ylamine Analogues
  • Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods. Starting materials are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich Corp. (St. Louis, Mo.), or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols. By way of example, a synthetic route similar to that shown in any of the following Schemes may be used, together with synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry. Each variable in the following schemes refers to any group consistent with the description of the compounds provided herein.
  • Other definitions used in the following Schemes and in the Examples are:
  • Ac2O acetic anhydride
    AcOH acetic acid
    CDCl3 deuterated chloroform
    δ chemical shift
    DME ethylene glycol dimethyl ether
    DMF dimethylformamide
    DPPF 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene
    EDCl 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
    Et ethyl
    EtOH ethanol
    1H NMR proton nuclear magnetic resonance
    HPLC high pressure liquid chromatography
    Hz hertz
    iPr isopropyl
    iPrOH isopropanol
    LCMS liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry
    KHMDS potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide
    MS mass spectrometry
    (M+1) mass+1
    KtBuO potassium tert-butoxide
    MeOH methanol
    THF tetrahydrofuran
    Pd2(dba)3 tris[dibenzylidineacetone]di-palladium
    Pd(PPh3)4 tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (0)
    Xantphos 4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)-9,9-dimethyl-xanthene
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00011
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00012
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00013
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00014
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00015
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00016
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00017
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00018
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00019
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00020
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00021
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00022
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00023
  • In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms. Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms. As noted above, all stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers (i.e., optically active forms). Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
  • Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope. Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14C), hydrogen (e.g., 3H), sulfur (e.g., 35S), or iodine (e.g., 125I). Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous-catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate. In addition, certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate. Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
    • Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient. Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives. In addition, other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration. The term parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique. In certain embodiments, compositions suitable for oral use are preferred. Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs. Within yet other embodiments, compositions of the present invention may be formulated as a lyophilizate. Formulation for topical administration may be preferred for certain conditions (e.g., in the treatment of skin conditions such as burns or itch). Formulation for direct administration into the bladder (intravesicular administration) may be preferred for treatment of urinary incontinence and overactive bladder.
  • Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations. Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets. Such excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc). The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
  • Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions. Such excipients include suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate). Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations. Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof. Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally-occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate). An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components. Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery. Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols (e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols (e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols (e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid-based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices. A composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials. Examples of such components are described in Martindale—The Extra Pharmacopoeia (Pharmaceutical Press, London 1993) and Martin (ed.), Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences. Formulations may comprise microcapsules, such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules.
  • A topical formulation may be prepared in a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions. The physical appearance and viscosity of such forms can be governed by the presence and amount of emulsifier(s) and viscosity adjuster(s) present in the formulation. Solids are generally firm and non-pourable and commonly are formulated as bars or sticks, or in particulate form; solids can be opaque or transparent, and optionally can contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Creams and lotions are often similar to one another, differing mainly in their viscosity; both lotions and creams may be opaque, translucent or clear and often contain emulsifiers, solvents, and viscosity adjusting agents, as well as moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Gels can be prepared with a range of viscosities, from thick or high viscosity to thin or low viscosity. These formulations, like those of lotions and creams, may also contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Liquids are thinner than creams, lotions, or gels and often do not contain emulsifiers. Liquid topical products often contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Suitable emulsifiers for use in topical formulations include, but are not limited to, ionic emulsifiers, cetearyl alcohol, non-ionic emulsifiers like polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, PEG-40 stearate, ceteareth-12, ceteareth-20, ceteareth-30, ceteareth alcohol, PEG-100 stearate and glyceryl stearate. Suitable viscosity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to, protective colloids or non-ionic gums such as hydroxyethylcellulose, xanthan gum, magnesium aluminum silicate, silica, microcrystalline wax, beeswax, paraffin, and cetyl palmitate. A gel composition may be formed by the addition of a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate. Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic, amphoteric, ionic and anionic surfactants. For example, one or more of dimethicone copolyol, polysorbate 20, polysorbate 40, polysorbate 60, polysorbate 80, lauramide DEA, cocamide DEA, and cocamide MEA, oleyl betaine, cocamidopropyl phosphatidyl PG-dimonium chloride, and ammonium laureth sulfate may be used within topical formulations. Suitable preservatives include, but are not limited to, antimicrobials such as methylparaben, propylparaben, sorbic acid, benzoic acid, and formaldehyde, as well as physical stabilizers and antioxidants such as vitamin E, sodium ascorbate/ascorbic acid and propyl gallate. Suitable moisturizers include, but are not limited to, lactic acid and other hydroxy acids and their salts, glycerin, propylene glycol, and butylene glycol. Suitable emollients include lanolin alcohol, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, cholesterol, petrolatum, isostearyl neopentanoate and mineral oils. Suitable fragrances and colors include, but are not limited to, FD&C Red No. 40 and FD&C Yellow No. 5. Other suitable additional ingredients that may be included a topical formulation include, but are not limited to, abrasives, absorbents, anti-caking agents, anti-foaming agents, anti-static agents, astringents (e.g., witch hazel, alcohol and herbal extracts such as chamomile extract), binders/excipients, buffering agents, chelating agents, film forming agents, conditioning agents, propellants, opacifying agents, pH adjusters and protectants.
  • An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation of a gel is: hydroxypropylcellulose (2.1%); 70/30 isopropyl alcohol/water (90.9%); propylene glycol (5.1%); and Polysorbate 80 (1.9%). An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation as a foam is: cetyl alcohol (1.1%); stearyl alcohol (0.5%; Quaternium 52 (1.0%); propylene glycol (2.0%); Ethanol 95 PGF3 (61.05%); deionized water (30.05%); P75 hydrocarbon propellant (4.30%). All percents are by weight.
  • Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing. Controlled release vehicles can also be used.
  • A pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectible aqueous or oleaginous suspension. The modulator, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle. Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectible compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
  • Compounds may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration). Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non-irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug. Suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as sustained release formulations (i.e., a formulation such as a capsule that effects a slow release of modulator following administration). Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site. Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • In addition to or together with the above modes of administration, a modulator may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock). Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
  • VR1 modulators are generally administered in a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount, and preferably a therapeutically effective amount. Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day (e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses (e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day).
  • The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated and the particular mode of administration. Dosage units will generally contain between from about 10 μg to about 500 mg of an active ingredient. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to VR1 modulation (e.g., treatment of exposure to vanilloid ligand, pain, itch, obesity or urinary incontinence). Packaged pharmaceutical compositions may include a container holding a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VR1 modulator as described herein and instructions (e.g., labeling) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to VR1 modulation in the patient.
    • Methods of Use
  • Compounds provided herein may be used to alter activity and/or activation of capsaicin receptors in a variety of contexts, both in vitro and in vivo. Within certain aspects, VR1 antagonists may be used to inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand agonist (such as capsaicin and/or RTX) to capsaicin receptor in vitro or in vivo. In general, such methods comprise the step of contacting a capsaicin receptor with a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of one or more VR1 modulators provided herein, in the presence of vanilloid ligand in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the ligand to capsaicin receptor. The capsaicin receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell. Within certain embodiments, the capsaicin receptor is expressed by a neuronal cell present in a patient, and the aqueous solution is a body fluid. Preferably, one or more VR1 modulators are administered to an animal in an amount such that the analogue is present in at least one body fluid of the animal at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 1 micromolar or less; preferably 500 nanomolar or less; more preferably 100 nanomolar or less, 50 nanomolar or less, 20 nanomolar or less, or 10 nanomolar or less. For example, such compounds may be administered at a dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg.
  • Also provided herein are methods for modulating, preferably reducing, the signal-transducing activity (i.e., the calcium conductance) of a cellular capsaicin receptor. Such modulation may be achieved by contacting a capsaicin receptor (either in vitro or in vivo) with a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of one or more VR1 modulators provided herein under conditions suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to the receptor. The receptor may be present in solution or suspension, in a cultured or isolated cell preparation or in a cell within a patient. For example, the cell may be a neuronal cell that is contacted in vivo in an animal. Alternatively, the cell may be an epithelial cell, such as a urinary bladder epithelial cell (urothelial cell) or an airway epithelial cell that is contacted in vivo in an animal. Modulation of signal tranducing activity may be assessed by detecting an effect on calcium ion conductance (also referred to as calcium mobilization or flux). Modulation of signal transducing activity may alternatively be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., pain, burning sensation, broncho-constriction, inflammation, cough, hiccup, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder) of a patient being treated with one or more VR1 modulators provided herein.
  • VR1 modulator(s) provided herein are preferably administered to a patient (e.g., a human) orally or topically, and are present within at least one body fluid of the animal while modulating VR1 signal-transducing activity. Preferred VR1 modulators for use in such methods modulate VR1 signal-transducing activity in vitro at a concentration of 1 nanomolar or less, preferably 100 picomolar or less, more preferably 20 picomolar or less, and in vivo at a concentration of 1 micromolar or less, 500 nanomolar or less, or 100 nanomolar or less in a body fluid such as blood.
  • The present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to VR1 modulation. Within the context of the present invention, the term “treatment” encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms). A condition is “responsive to VR1 modulation” if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of a capsaicin receptor, regardless of the amount of vanilloid ligand present locally, and/or if modulation of capsaicin receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof. Such conditions include, for example, symptoms resulting from exposure to VR1-activating stimuli, pain, respiratory disorders such as asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, cough, hiccup, and obesity, as described in more detail below. Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art. Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above.
  • Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated. However, for treatment of most disorders, a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred. In general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred. For the treatment of acute pain, a single dose that rapidly reaches effective concentrations is desirable. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. In general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
  • Patients experiencing symptoms resulting from exposure to capsaicin receptor-activating stimuli include individuals with burns caused by heat, light, tear gas or acid and those whose mucous membranes are exposed (e.g., via ingestion, inhalation or eye contact) to capsaicin (e.g., from hot peppers or in pepper spray) or a related irritant such as acid, tear gas or air pollutants. The resulting symptoms (which may be treated using VR1 modulators, especially antagonists, provided herein) may include, for example, pain, broncho-constriction and inflammation.
  • Pain that may be treated using the VR1 modulators provided herein may be chronic or acute and includes, but is not limited to, peripheral nerve-mediated pain (especially neuropathic pain). Compounds provided herein may be used in the treatment of, for example, postmastectomy pain syndrome, stump pain, phantom limb pain, oral neuropathic pain, toothache (dental pain), denture pain, postherpetic neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, fibromyalgia, Guillain-Barre syndrome, meralgia paresthetica, burning-mouth syndrome and/or bilateral peripheral neuropathy. Additional neuropathic pain conditions include causalgia (reflex sympathetic dystrophy —RSD, secondary to injury of a peripheral nerve), neuritis (including, for example, sciatic neuritis, peripheral neuritis, polyneuritis, optic neuritis, postfebrile neuritis, migrating neuritis, segmental neuritis and Gombault's neuritis), neuronitis, neuralgias (e.g., those mentioned above, cervicobrachial neuralgia, cranial neuralgia, geniculate neuralgia, glossopharyngial neuralgia, migranous neuralgia, idiopathic neuralgia, intercostals neuralgia, mammary neuralgia, mandibular joint neuralgia, Morton's neuralgia, nasociliary neuralgia, occipital neuralgia, red neuralgia, Sluder's neuralgia, splenopalatine neuralgia, supraorbital neuralgia and vidian neuralgia), surgery-related pain, musculoskeletal pain, AIDS-related neuropathy, MS-related neuropathy, and spinal cord injury-related pain. Headache, including headaches involving peripheral nerve activity, such as sinus, cluster (i.e., migranous neuralgia) and some tension headaches and migraine, may also be treated as described herein. For example, migraine headaches may be prevented by administration of a compound provided herein as soon as a pre-migrainous aura is experienced by the patient. Further pain conditions that can be treated as described herein include “burning mouth syndrome,” labor pains, Charcot's pains, intestinal gas pains, menstrual pain, acute and chronic back pain (e.g., lower back pain), hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, homotopic pain and heterotopic pain—including cancer associated pain (e.g., in patients with bone cancer), pain (and inflammation) associated with venom exposure (e.g., due to snake bite, spider bite, or insect sting) and trauma associated pain (e.g., post-surgical pain, pain from cuts, bruises and broken bones, and burn pain). Additional pain conditions that may be treated as described herein include pain associated with inflammatory bowel disease, irritable bowel syndrome and/or inflammatory bowel disease.
  • Within certain aspects, VR1 modulators provided herein may be used for the treatment of mechanical pain. As used herein, the term “mechanical pain” refers to pain other than headache pain that is not neuropathic or a result of exposure to heat, cold or external chemical stimuli. Mechanical pain includes physical trauma (other than thermal or chemical burns or other irritating and/or painful exposures to noxious chemicals) such as post-surgical pain and pain from cuts, bruises and broken bones; toothache, denture pain; nerve root pain; osteoarthritis; rheumatoid arthritis; fibromyalgia; meralgia paresthetica; back pain; cancer-associated pain; angina; carpel tunnel syndrome; and pain resulting from bone fracture, labor, hemorrhoids, intestinal gas, dyspepsia, and menstruation.
  • Itching conditions that may be treated include psoriatic pruritis, itch due to hemodialysis, aguagenic pruritus, and itching associated with vulvar vestibulitis, contact dermatitis, insect bites and skin allergies. Urinary tract conditions that may be treated as described herein include urinary incontinence (including overflow incontinence, urge incontinence and stress incontinence), as well as overactive or unstable bladder conditions (including detrusor hyperflexia of spinal origin and bladder hypersensitivity). In certain such treatment methods, VR1 modulator is administered via a catheter or similar device, resulting in direct injection of VR1 modulator into the bladder. Compounds provided herein may also be used as anti-tussive agents (to prevent, relieve or suppress coughing) and for the treatment of hiccup, and to promote weight loss in an obese patient.
  • Within other aspects, VR1 modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions involving inflammatory components. Such conditions include, for example, autoimmune disorders and pathologic autoimmune responses known to have an inflammatory component including, but not limited to, arthritis (especially rheumatoid arthritis), psoriasis, Crohn's disease, lupus erythematosus, irritable bowel syndrome, tissue graft rejection, and hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs. Other such conditions include trauma (e.g., injury to the head or spinal cord), cardio- and cerebo-vascular disease and certain infectious diseases.
  • Within such combination therapy, a VR1 modulator is administered to a patient along with an anti-inflammatory agent. The VR1 modulator and anti-inflammatory agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order. Anti-inflammatory agents include, for example, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), non-specific and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) specific cyclooxygenase enzyme inhibitors, gold compounds, corticosteroids, methotrexate, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor antagonists, anti-TNF alpha antibodies, anti-C5 antibodies, and interleukin-1 (IL-1) receptor antagonists. Examples of NSAIDs include, but are not limited to ibuprofen (e.g., ADVIL™, MOTRIN™), flurbiprofen (ANSAID™), naproxen or naproxen sodium (e.g., NAPROSYN, ANAPROX, ALEVE™), diclofenac (e.g., CATAFLAM™, VOLTAREN™), combinations of diclofenac sodium and misoprostol (e.g., ARTHROTEC™), sulindac (CLINORIL™), oxaprozin (DAYPRO™), diflunisal (DOLOBID™), piroxicam (FELDENE™), indomethacin (INDOCIN™), etodolac (LODINE™), fenoprofen calcium (NALFON™), ketoprofen (e.g., ORUDIS™, ORUVAIL™), sodium nabumetone (RELAFEN™), sulfasalazine (AZULFIDINE™), tolmetin sodium (TOLECTIN™), and hydroxychloroquine (PLAQUENIL™). A particular class of NSAIDs consists of compounds that inhibit cyclooxygenase (COX) enzymes, such as celecoxib (CELEBREX™) and rofecoxib (VIOXX™). NSAIDs further include salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline and magnesium salicylates (TRILISATE™), and salsalate (DISALCID™), as well as corticosteroids such as cortisone (CORTONE™ acetate), dexamethasone (e.g., DECADRON™), methylprednisolone (MEDROL™) prednisolone (PRELONE™), prednisolone sodium phosphate (PEDIAPRED™), and prednisone (e.g., PREDNICEN-M™, DELTASONE™, STERAPRED™).
  • Suitable dosages for VR1 modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of anti-inflammatory agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a VR1 modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the anti-inflammatory agent required to produce a therapeutic effect. Thus, preferably, the dosage of anti-inflammatory agent in a combination or combination treatment method of the invention is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent without combination administration of a VR1 antagonist. More preferably this dosage is less than ¾, even more preferably less than ½, and highly preferably, less than ¼ of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent(s) when administered without combination administration of a VR1 antagonist. It will be apparent that the dosage amount of VR1 antagonist component of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be affected by the dosage amount and potency of the anti-inflammatory agent component of the combination.
  • In certain preferred embodiments, the combination administration of a VR1 modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent is accomplished by packaging one or more VR1 modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more VR1 antagonists and one or more anti-inflammatory agents. Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like). In certain embodiments, the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more VR1 modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents are to be taken together for the treatment of an inflammatory pain condition. A highly preferred combination is one in which the anti-inflammatory agent(s) include at least one COX-2 specific cyclooxygenase enzyme inhibitor such as valdecoxib (BEXTRA®), lumiracoxib (PREXIGE™), etoricoxib (ARCOXIA®), celecoxib (CELEBREX®) and/or rofecoxib (VIOXX®).
  • Within further aspects, VR1 modulators provided herein may be used in combination with one or more additional pain relief medications. Certain such medications are also anti-inflammatory agents, and are listed above. Other such medications are narcotic analgesic agents, which typically act at one or more opioid receptor subtypes (e.g., μ, κ and/or δ), preferably as agonists or partial agonists. Such agents include opiates, opiate derivatives and opioids, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof. Specific examples of narcotic analgesics include, within preferred embodiments, alfentanyl, alphaprodine, anileridine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, codeine, diacetyldihydromorphine, diacetylmorphine, dihydrocodeine, diphenoxylate, ethylmorphine, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, isomethadone, levomethorphan, levorphane, levorphanol, meperidine, metazocine, methadone, methorphan, metopon, morphine, opium extracts, opium fluid extracts, powdered opium, granulated opium, raw opium, tincture of opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, paregoric, pentazocine, pethidine, phenazocine, piminodine, propoxyphene, racemethorphan, racemorphan, thebaine and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates of the foregoing agents.
  • Other examples of narcotic analgesic agents include acetorphine, acetyldihydrocodeine, acetylmethadol, allylprodine, alphracetylmethadol, alphameprodine, alphamethadol, benzethidine, benzylmorphine, betacetylmethadol, betameprodine, betamethadol, betaprodine, butorphanol, clonitazene, codeine methylbromide, codeine-N-oxide, cyprenorphine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, diampromide, diethylthiambutene, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiamubutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, drotebanol, ethanol, ethylmethylthiambutene, etonitazene, etorphine, etoxeridine, furethidine, hydromorphinol, hydroxypethidine, ketobemidone, levomoramide, levophenacylmorphan, methyldesorphine, methyldihydromorphine, morpheridine, morphine methylpromide, morphine methylsulfonate, morphine-N-oxide, myrophin, naloxone, nalbuyphine, naltyhexone, nicocodeine, nicomorphine, noracymethadol, norlevorphanol, normethadone, normorphine, norpipanone, pentazocaine, phenadoxone, phenampromide, phenomorphan, phenoperidine, piritramide, pholcodine, proheptazoineii, properidine, propiran, racemoramide, thebacon, trimeperidine and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof.
  • Further specific representative analgesic agents include, for example: TALWIN® Nx and DEMEROL® (both available from Sanofi Winthrop Pharmaceuticals; New York, N.Y.); LEVO-DROMORAN®; BUPRENEX® (Reckitt & Coleman Pharmaceuticals, Inc.; Richmond, Va.); MSIR® (Purdue Pharma L.P.; Norwalk, Conn.); DILAUDID® (Knoll Pharmaceutical Co.; Mount Olive, N.J.); SUBLIMAZE®; SUFENTA® (Janssen Pharmaceutica Inc.; Titusville, N.J.); PERCOCET®, NUBAIN® and NUMORPHAN® (all available from Endo Pharmaceuticals Inc.; Chadds Ford, Pa.) HYDROSTAT® IR, MS/S and MS/L (all available from Richwood Pharmaceutical Co. Inc; Florence, Ky.), ORAMORPH® SR and ROXICODONE® (both available from Roxanne Laboratories; Columbus Ohio) and STADOL® (Bristol-Myers Squibb; New York, N.Y.). Still further analgesic agents include CB2-receptor agonists, such as AM1241, and compounds that bind to the α2δ subunit, such as Neurontin (Gabapentin) and pregabalin.
  • Suitable dosages for VR1 modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of other pain relief medications can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a VR1 modulator with one or more additional pain medications results in a reduction of the dosage of each therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (e.g., the dosage or one or both agent may less than ¾, less than ½, less than ¼ or less than 10% of the maximum dose listed above or advised by the manufacturer). In certain preferred embodiments, the combination administration of a VR1 modulator with one or more additional pain relief medications is accomplished by packaging one or more VR1 modulators and one or more additional pain relief medications in the same package, as described above.
  • Modulators that are VR1 agonists may further be used, for example, in crowd control (as a substitute for tear gas) or personal protection (e.g., in a spray formulation) or as pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of pain, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder via capsaicin receptor desensitization. In general, compounds for use in crowd control or personal protection are formulated and used according to conventional tear gas or pepper spray technology.
  • Within separate aspects, the present invention provides a variety of non-pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the compounds provided herein. For example, such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of capsaicin receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof). In addition, compounds provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group (such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group) may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites. In addition, compounds provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity, as standards for determining the ability of a candidate agent to bind to capsaicin receptor, or as radiotracers for positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or for single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT). Such methods can be used to characterize capsaicin receptors in living subjects. For example, a VR1 modulator may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and incubated with a sample for a suitable incubation time (e.g., determined by first assaying a time course of binding). Following incubation, unbound compound is removed (e.g., by washing), and bound compound detected using any method suitable for the label employed (e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups). As a control, a matched sample containing labeled compound and a greater (e.g., 10-fold greater) amount of unlabeled compound may be processed in the same manner. A greater amount of detectable label remaining in the test sample than in the control indicates the presence of capsaicin receptor in the sample. Detection assays, including receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of capsaicin receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York.
  • Modulators provided herein may also be used within a variety of well known cell separation methods. For example, modulators may be linked to the interior surface of a tissue culture plate or other support, for use as affinity ligands for immobilizing and thereby isolating, capsaicin receptors (e.g., isolating receptor-expressing cells) in vitro. Within one preferred embodiment, a modulator linked to a fluorescent marker, such as fluorescein, is contacted with the cells, which are then analyzed (or isolated) by fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • Modulators provided herein may further be used within assays for the identification of other agents that bind to capsaicin receptor. In general, such assays are standard competition binding assays, in which bound, labeled VR1 modulator is displaced by a test compound. Briefly, such assays are performed by: (a) contacting capsaicin receptor with a radiolabeled VR1 modulator as described herein, under conditions that permit binding of the VR1 modulator to capsaicin receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled VR1 modulator; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled VR1 modulator in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled VR1 modulator with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled VR1 modulator in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b), and therefrom identifying an agent that binds to capsaicin receptor.
  • The following Examples are offered by way of illustration and not by way of limitation. Unless otherwise specified all reagents and solvent are of standard commercial grade and are used without further purification. Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein.
    • EXAMPLES
  • In the following Examples, mass spectroscopy data is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode with a 15V or 30V cone voltage, using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT, equipped with a Waters 600 pump, Waters 996 photodiode array detector, Gilson 215 autosampler, and a Gilson 841 microinjector. MassLynx (Advanced Chemistry Development, Inc; Toronto, Canada) version 4.0 software was used for data collection and analysis. Sample volume of 1 microliter was injected onto a 50×4.6 mm Chromolith SpeedROD C18 column, and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at 6 ml/min flow rate. Sample was detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340 nm UV range. The elution conditions were: Mobile Phase A—95/5/0.05 Water/Methanol/TFA; Mobile Phase B—5/95/0.025 Water/Methanol/TFA.
  • Gradient:
    Time(min) % B
    0 10
    0.5 100
    1.2 100
    1.21 10
  • The total run time was 2 minutes inject to inject.
  • For the compounds described in Examples 1 and 2, the IC50 determined as described in Example 6, herein, is 1 micromolar or less.
    • Example 1 Preparation of Representative Substituted Quinolin-4-ylamine Analogues
  • A. Using the procedure illustrated in Scheme 1,2-methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]napthyridin-4-yl-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-amine is prepared by the following steps:
    • 1. 2-cyano-3-trifluoromethylpyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00024
  • DMF (3500 mL), H2O (35 mL), 2-chloro-3-trifluoromethyl-pyridine (250 g; 1.38 mol), Zn(CN)2 (97 g; 0.83 mol), Pd2(dba)3 (19.0 g) and DPPF (22.4 g) are combined in a 22.0 liter flask. The reaction mixture is degassed by bubbling N2 into the reaction mixture over a period of 30 minutes. The reaction mixture is then heated to 120° C. for 4.5 hours, at which time an additional 9.5 g of Pd2(dba)3 and 11.2 g of DPPF is added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture is then heated at 120° C. for another 2 hours, and then allowed to cool to room temperature overnight. The resulting dark brown solution is cooled in ice and cold water. A mixture of saturated NH4Cl (1380 mL), 28% NH4OH (345 mL and water (1380 mL) is then added and the mixture is stirred in an ice bath for 1 hour. To this stirred mixture is added 3.0 liters of EtOAc, and the mixture is stirred for 15 minutes. The EtOAc layer is separated from the mixture by suction the extraction is repeated another four times with EtOAc (2×2 liters, 2×1.5 liters). The combined EtOAc extracts are filtered through one inch of celite and dried with Na2SO4 (500 g). The dried extract is filtered and concentrated in vacuum at 40° C. initially to a volume of three liters. The mixture is concentrated at 80° C. under vacuum to afford a dark brown oil, which is distilled under vacuum to give 2-cyano-3-trifluoromethylpyridine.
    • 2. 2-acetyl-3-trifluoromethylpyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00025
  • 2-cyano-3-trifluoromethylpyridine (179 g; 1.04 mol) and THF (1200 mL) are combined in a 5.0 liter flask and cooled with and ice and salt mixture. 3.0 M MeMgI/Et2O (694 mL) is added drop wise over a period of 90 minutes while maintaining the inside temperature of the reaction mixture below 5° C. After the addition, the reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for another 30 minutes, and is then slowly poured over 3.0 kg of crushed ice in a 12 liter vessel with stirring (6° C.). The undissolved magnesium salts from the original reaction vessel are quenched with ice (750 g) and transferred to the 12 liter vessel. The resulting mixture is acidified with 6.0 N aq. HCl to pH 2.0 and stirred for 30 minutes at <10° C. The mixture is then extracted with EtOAc (5×1 liters), and the combined extracts are washed with brine (1.5 liters) and dried with Na2SO4 (500 g). The dried extract is filtered and concentrated in vacuum at 40° C. to afford a dark brown oil. The crude product is distilled under vacuum to give 2-acetyl-3-trifluoromethylpyridine as a clear pale yellow liquid.
    • 3. 3-dimethylamino-1-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-propenone
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00026
  • 2-acetyl-3-trifluoromethylpyridine (150 g; 0.79 mol) and (Me)2N—CH(OMe)2 (236 g; 1.98 mol) are combined in a 1 liter flask. The mixture is heated with stirring at 105° C. for 5 hours. Excess (Me)2N—CH(OMe)2 is removed under vacuum at 60° C. and the mixture is dried under high vacuum (0.1 torr) for 1 hour to yield 3-dimethylamino-1-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-propenone as a brown oil.
    • 4. 3-amino-3-methoxyacrylonitrile hydrochloride
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00027
  • Malononitrile (198 g; 3 mol), HCO2Me (1.0 L) and MeOH (240 mL) are added to a 3 liter flask and cooled with an ice and salt mixture. SOCl2 is added drop wise over a period of 60 minutes while maintaining the inside temperature of the reaction mixture below 10° C. After the addition, the reaction mixture is stirred at 0-10° C. for another 60 minutes to yield a yellow solid suspension. The salt that separated from the mixture is filtered, and the solid is washed with HCO2Me (2×75 mL) and air dried for 15 minutes. The salt is dried under vacuum at 25° C. for 1 hour to yield 3-amino-3-methoxyacrylonitrile hydrochloride as a white solid.
    • 5. 6-Amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carbonitrile
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00028
  • 3-dimethylamino-1-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-propenone (191.7 g; 0.79 mol), EtOH (2000 mL), NH4OAc (302.6 g; 9.93 mol) and 3-amino-3-methoxyacrylonitrile hydrochloride (211.2 g; 1.57 mol) are combined in a 5 liter flask. The reaction mixture is heated to 80° C. for 7 hours. The mixture is then allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The solid that separates at this stage is filtered and washed with small amount of cold EtOH to afford 133 g of light brick solid. The solid is treated with 750 mL of EtOAc and the mixture is washed with saturated NaHCO3. The organic extract is dried with Na2SO4 (100 g), filtered and concentrated in vacuum at 40° C. to yield 6-amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′] bipyridinyl-5-carbonitrile as a light brick colored solid.
    • 6. 6-Amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carboxylic acid
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00029
  • 6-Amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carbonitrile (2.33 g, 8.82 mmol) is dissolved in 12M HCl (50 mL) and heated at 110° C. overnight. The aqueous acid is removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as its hydrochloride salt.
    • 7. 6-Amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carboxylic acid 2,5-dioxo-pyrrolidin-1-yl ester
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00030
  • 6-Amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carboxylic acid hydrochloride (11.33 g, 35.44 mmol), N-hydroxy-succinimide (8.15 g, 70.9 mmol), and EDCl (10.19 g, 53.16 mmol) are dissolved in a solution of dry THF (100 mL) and Hunig's base (16.12 g, 125 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at room temperature. Ethyl acetate (200 mL) is added and the organic phase extracted with water (3×100 mL) and brine (100 mL). The organic extract is dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as a brown foam.
    • 8. 4-Hydroxy-2-methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]napthyridine-3-carboxylic acid methyl ester
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00031
  • A solution of 6-amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carboxylic acid 2,5-dioxo-pyrrolidin-1-yl ester (10.4 g, 27.3 mmol) in 50 mL dry THF is added in one portion to a mixture of potassium t-butoxide (7.36 g, 65.6 mmol) and methyl 4-methoxy-acetoacetate (8.77 g, 60.7 mmol) in dry THF (100 mL). The reaction is stirred overnight at room temperature. Water (30 mL) is added and the solution concentrated (˜30 mL). The resulting mixture is extracted with ether (2×50 mL). The aqueous portion is acidified with concentrated hydrochloric acid and extracted with CH2Cl2 (4×100 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as a light brown oil that solidifies upon standing.
    • 9. 2-Methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]napthyridin-4-ol
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00032
  • 4-Hydroxy-2-methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]napthyridine-3-carboxylic acid methyl ester (200 mg, 0.508 mmol) is dissolved in 12 M HCl (20 mL) and heated at 110° C. for 6 hours. The reaction mixture is poured onto ice (100 g) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (4×150 mL). The combined organic extracts are dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is purified by silica gel preparatory TLC eluting with hexanes/acetone (3:1) yielding the title compound as a white solid.
    • 10. 4-Chloro-2-methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]napthyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00033
  • 2-Methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]napthyridin-4-ol (191 mg, 0.569 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of chloroform (15 mL), POCl3 (0.212 mL, 2.28 mmol) and 2,6-lutidine (0.256 mL, 2.28 mmol). The reaction is heated at reflux overnight. The mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue is dissolved in EtOAc (50 mL) and extracted with water (50 mL), saturated NaHCO3 (aq) (50 mL) and brine (50 mL). The organic extract is dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is purified by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexanes/EtOAc (1:1) to yield the title compound as a white solid.
    • 11. 2-Methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]napthyridin-4-yl]-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00034
  • 4-Chloro-2-methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]napthyridine (25 mg, 0.0708 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of isopropyl alcohol (2 mL) and 4-trifluoromethyl-aniline (25 mg, 0.155 mmol). The mixture is heated overnight at 60° C. The solution is concentrated under reduced pressure. The title compound is isolated as a light yellow solid after silica gel preparatory TLC eluting with hexanes/acetone (2:1). Mass Spec 479 (M+1).
  • B. Using a similar procedure, 2-methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]napthyridin-4-yl-(4-t-butylphenyl)-amine (Mass spec 467.2) is prepared:
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00035
  • C. 2-Methoxymethyl-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-amine is prepared according to the procedure shown in Scheme 2, as follows:
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00036
  • To a de-gassed mixture of 4-chloro-2-methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine (1 mmol), cesium carbonate (2 mmol), 2-amino-trifluoromethyl pyridine (1 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL) under nitrogen, add Pd2 dba3 (0.05 mmol) and xantphos (0.05 mol). Stir the mixture at 90° C. overnight, concentrate, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify by column chromatography eluting with dichloromethane/methanol/ammonium hydroxide mixture to give 2-methoxymethyl-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-amine. MS 480 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 8.88 (1H, d), 8.62 (1H, s), 8.18 (1H, d), 8.07 (1H, s), 7.88 (1H, dd), 7.84 (1H, d), 7.56 (1H, d), 7.54 (1H, d), 7.30 (1H, d), 4.77 (2H, s), 3.52 (3H, s), 2.63 (1H, br s).
  • D. 4-[(4-Trifluoromethylphenyl)amino]-7-(3-trifluoromethylpyridin-2-yl)-2-methoxymethyl-[1,8]naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid is prepared according to the procedure shown in Scheme 3, by the following steps:
    • 1. Methyl 4-chloro-2-methoxymethyl-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,8]naphthyridine-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00037
  • Dissolve 4-hydroxy-2-methoxymethyl-7-(3-trifluoromethylpyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid methyl ester (500 mg, 1.27 mmol) in a solution of POCl3 (0.4 mL), 2,6-lutidine (0.43 mL) and CHCl3 (25 mL). Heat the mixture at reflux overnight. Remove the solvent under reduced pressure. Partition the residue between CH2Cl2 and saturated NaHCO3 (aq). Extract the aqueous layer twice with CH2Cl2 (2×100 mL). Dry the combined organic extracts over Na2SO4. Remove the solvent under reduced pressure. Purify the crude product by preparatory TLC eluting with EtOAc\Hexanes (1:1) to yield the title compound.
    • 2. Methyl 4-[(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)amino]-7-(3-trifluoromethylpyridin-2-yl)-2-methoxymethyl-[1,8]naphthyridine-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00038
  • Dissolve methyl 4-chloro-2-methoxymethyl-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,8]naphthyridine-3-carboxylate (212 mg, 0.52 mmol) in acetonitrile (5 mL) and add 4 drops 2M HCl (Et2O). Stir the mixture for 3 hours at room temperature. Filter off the resulting yellow precipitate to yield the title compound as its hydrochloride salt. MS 537.20 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (Free base, CDCl3) 9.91 (1H, s), 8.88 (1H, m), 8.16 (2H, m), 7.67-7.55 (4H, m), 7.12 (1H, d), 6.99 (1H, d), 4.42 (2H, s), 4.02 (3H, s), 3.95 (3H, s).
    • 3. 4-[(4-Trifluoromethylphenyl)amino]-7-(3-trifluoromethylpyridin-2-yl)-2-methoxymethyl-[1,8]naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00039
  • Stir a solution of methyl 4-[(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)amino]-7-(3-trifluoromethylpyridin-2-yl)-2-methoxymethyl-[1,8]naphthyridine-3-carboxylate (114 mg, 0.212 mmol), LiOH.H2O (45.0 mg, 1.06 mmol), THF (2 mL) and water (0.1 mL) for 18 hours at room temperature. Add water (20 mL) and acidify with acetic acid. Extract the solution with EtOAc (3×25 mL). Wash the combined organic extracts with brine and dry over Na2SO4. Remove the solvent under reduced pressure to yield the title compound. MS 523.18 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 11.50 (1H, br s), 8.89 (1H, s), 8.19 (2H, d), 7.88 (1H, dd), 7.67 (2H, m), 7.59 (1H, dd), 7.51 (2H, d), 7.22 (1H, br s), 5.30 (2H, s), 3.65 (3H, s).
  • E. 4-(tert-Butyl-phenyl)-[2-methoxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-yl]-amine is prepared according to the procedure shown in Scheme 4, as follows:
    • 1. 6-Amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carboxylic acid
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00040
  • Heat a mixture of 6-amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carbonitrile (5 g) in concentrated hydrochloric acid at 100° C. for 12 hours. Cool the mixture and evaporate to dryness to give the hydrochloride salt of the title compound.
    • 2. 6-Amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carboxylic acid methyl ester
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00041
  • Saturate a solution of 6-amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carboxylic acid (5 g) in methanol (100 ml) with hydrogen chloride gas. Heat the mixture at reflux for 4 days and evaporate to dryness. Partition the mixture between ethyl acetate and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. Separate the layers and extract the aqueous layer with further ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry (MgSO4) and evaporate to give the title compound.
    • 3. 4-Hydroxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-1H-[1,8]naphthyridin-2-one
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00042
  • Heat a solution of 6-amino-3′-trifluoromethyl-[2,2′]bipyridinyl-5-carboxylic acid methyl ester (1.0 mmol) acetic anhydride (2 mL) in pyridine (2 mL) at 90° C. for 8 hours. Cool the mixture and evaporate to dryness. Add saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (30 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry and evaporate. Dissolve the solid in THF (4 mL) and add drop wise to a solution of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (600 mg, 3.0 mmol) in toluene (6 mL) at −78° C. Allow the reaction to return to room temperature overnight. Add water (10 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate. Acidify the aqueous layer with hydrochloric acid and collect the precipitate by filtration. Air-dry to give the title compound.
    • 4. 2,4-Dichloro-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00043
  • Reflux 4-hydroxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-1H-[1,8]naphthyridin-2-one (1.2 g) for 18 hours in POCl3 (5 mL). Evaporate the solvent, carefully neutralize with saturated NaHCO3 and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum to obtain the title compound.
    • 5. 4-Chloro-2-methoxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00044
  • Add sodium methoxide (4M, 1.0 mL, 4.0 mmol) to a solution of 2,4-dichloro-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine (1.2 g, 3.5 mmol) in THF (30 mL). Stir at room temperature overnight, add water (25 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry (MgSO4) and evaporate. Purify the residue by flash chromatography (elute with 1:2 hexane:ether) to give the title compound.
    • 6. 4-tert-Butyl-phenyl)-[2-methoxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-yl]-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00045
  • Heat a mixture of 4-chloro-2-methoxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine (500 mg, 1.47 mmol), 4-tert-butylaniline (240 mg, 1.6 mmol), palladium acetate (33 mg, 0.15 mmol), 2-(dicyclohexylphosphino)biphenyl (53 mg, 0.15 mmol) and potassium phosphate (0.5 M, 9 mL, 4.5 mmol) in dioxane (20 mL) at 100° C. for 16 hours. Cool the mixture and partition between ethyl acetate and water. Separate the layers and extract the aqueous layer with further ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry (MgSO4) and evaporate. Triturate the residue with ether to give the title compound as the hydrochloride salt. MS 453 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (DMSO) 9.07 (1H, s), 8.95 (1H, d), 8.86 (1H, d), 8.38 (1H, d), 7.77 (1H, m), 7.66 (1H, d), 7.44 (2H, d), 7.29 (2H, d), 6.27 (1H, s), 3.88 (3H, s), 1.30 (9H, s).
  • F. (4-Trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-[7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-yl-amine is prepared according to the procedure shown in Scheme 5, as follows:
    • 1. 4-(4-Trifluoromethyl-phenylamino)-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-2-ol
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00046
  • Heat 4-chloro-2-methoxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine (600 mg, 1.8 mmol), 4-trifluoromethylaniline (322 mg, 2.0 mmol) and 2M hydrochloric acid in ether (1 mL, 2.0 mmol) in isopropanol (15 mL) at 80° C. for 16 hours. Cool the mixture and collect the precipitate by filtration. Partition the solid between ethyl acetate and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. Separate the layers and extract the aqueous layer with further ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry (MgSO4) and evaporate to give the title compound.
    • 2. 2-Chloro-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-yl]-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00047
  • Reflux 4-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenylamino)-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-2-ol (233 mg) for 2 hours in POCl3 (2 mL). Evaporate the solvent, carefully neutralize with saturated NaHCO3, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum to obtain the title compound.
    • 3. (4-Trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-[7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-yl-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00048
  • Hydrogenate, at 50 psi, a mixture of 10% Pd—C (10 mg) and 2-chloro-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-yl]-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-amine (40 mg) in 95% EtOH (10 mL). Filter through a celite pad and concentrate the filtrate. Purify the residue by preparative TLC (elute with 2:1 ethyl acetate:hexane) to give the title compound. MS 435 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 8.98 (1H, d), 8.74 (1H, s), 8.62 (1H, m), 8.18 (1H, d), 7.78 (1H, d), 7.62 (2H, d), 7.50 (3H, m), 6.80 (1H, m).
  • G. 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine is prepared according to the procedure shown in Scheme 5, as follows:
    • 1. 2-Methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00049
  • To a de-gassed mixture of 4-chloro-2-methoxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine (1 mmol), cesium carbonate (2 mmol), 2-aminotrifluoromethylpyridine (1 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL) under nitrogen, add Pd2 dba3 (0.05 mmol) and xantphos (0.05 mol). Stir the mixture at 90° C. overnight, concentrate, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify by column chromatography eluting with dichloromethane/methanol/ammonium hydroxide mixture to give the title compound.
    • 2. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridin-2-ol
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00050
  • Heat 2-methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-amine (128 mg), 1M hydrochloric acid in ether (0.25 mL) and isopropanol at 80° C. overnight. Cool and collect the precipitate by filtration to give the hydrochloride salt of the title compound.
    • 3. 2-Chloro-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00051
  • Heat 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]amino}-[1,8]naphthyridin-2-ol (112 mg) and phosphorus oxychloride (1 mL) at reflux for 1 hour. Evaporate to dryness, partition between ethyl acetate and saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and extract with EtOAc. Dry the combined organics over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum to obtain the title compound.
    • 4. 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00052
  • Stir a mixture of 2-chloro-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-amine (40 mg), ammonium formate (31 mg), 10% palladium on carbon (10 mg) in methanol (2 mL) at 50° C. for 2 hours. Cool, filter through Celite and evaporate to dryness. Purify by preparative thin layer chromatography, eluting with dichloromethane/methanol/ammonium hydroxide mixture to give the title compound. MS 436 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 8.99 (1H, s), 8.84 (1H, d), 8.63 (1H, d), 8.61 (1H, s), 8.32 (1H, brs), 8.14 (1H, d), 8.05 (1H, brs), 7.79-7.85 (2H, m), 7.51 (1H, dd), 7.22 (1H, d).
  • H. 4-[(4-Trifluoromethylphenyl)amino]-7-(3-trifluoromethylpyridin-2-yl)-2-(methoxymethyl)-1,8-naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid is prepared according to the procedure shown in Scheme 6, as follows:
    • 1. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridine-2-carbonitrile
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00053
  • In a sealed tube, bubble argon through a solution of 2-chloro-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine (360 mg, 0.766 mmol), ZnCN2 (63 mg, 0.536 mmol), DMF (10 mL) and water (0.1 mL). Add Pd2 dba3 (21 mg, 0.023 mmol) and DPPF (25 mg, 0.046 mmol) to the degassed solution and heat the mixture at 120° C. for one hour. Cool the mixture and add EtOAc (100 mL). Extract the mixture with 1N NaOH (3×100 mL). Dry the organic layer over Na2SO4 and remove the solvent under reduced pressure. Triturate the resulting solid with Et2O to yield the title compound as an orange solid. MS 461.02 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 8.90 (1H, d), 8.76 (1H, s), 8.73 (1H, s), 8.59 (1H, d), 8.20 (1H, dd), 8.04 (1H, d), 7.96 (1H, dd), 7.91 (1H, m), 7.59 (1H, dd), 7.22 (1H, d).
    • 2. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridine-2-carboxamide
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00054
  • Dissolve 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridine-2-carbonitrile (25 g, 0.054 mmol) in concentrated H2SO4 (2 mL) and stir the mixture overnight at ambient temperature. Pour the mixture onto ice and adjust the pH to about 7-8. Filter off the resulting precipitate to yield the title compound as an off-white solid. MS 479.02 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CD3OD) 9.32 (1H, s), 9.10 (1H, d), 8.97 (1H, d), 8.71 (1H, s), 8.41 (1H, d), 8.05 (1H, d), 7.95 (1H, d), 7.82 (1H, m), 8.90 (1H, s), 7.44.
    • 3. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridine-2-carboxylic acid
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00055
  • Dissolve 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridine-2-carboxamide (25 mg, 0.054 mmol) in 12M HCl (3 mL) and heat at 85° C. overnight. Pour onto ice and adjust the pH to about 4. Extract with EtOAc (3×100 mL). Dry the combined organic extracts over Na2SO4 and remove the solvent under reduced pressure. Purify the crude residue by preparatory TLC eluting with CH2Cl2/MeOH/AcOH (90:10:1) to yield the title compound. MS 480.00 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CD3OD) 9.58 (1H, s), 9.20 (1H, m), 8.95 (1H, m), 8.80 (1H, s), 8.38 (1H, m), 8.13 (1H, d), 8.00 (1H, m), 7.75 (1H, m), 7.55 (1H, d).
    • Example 2 Preparation of Additional Representative Substituted Quinolin-4-ylamine Analogues
  • A. (4-tert-Butyl-phenyl)-[7-(2-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-quinolin-4-yl]-amine is prepared by the following steps:
    • 1. 7-(2-Trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-quinolin-4-ol
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00056
  • Combine 7-chloroquinolin-4-ol (1000 mg, 5.55 mmol,) 2-(trifluoromethyl)phenylboronic acid (1583 mg, 8.33 mmol) and toluene (50 mL), and bubble nitrogen into the solution for 10 minutes. Add palladium acetate (25 mg, 0.11 mmol), 2-(dicyclohexylphosphino)biphenyl (78 mg, 0.22 mmol), and K3PO4 (2353 mg, 11.1 mmol) and heat at 90° C. for 16 hours. Let cool, add water (25 mL) and EtOAc (50 mL), and remove any insoluble material by filtration. Separate the EtOAc layer, and extract the aqueous layer twice with EtOAc (25 mL each). Combine the EtOAc extracts, dry (Na2SO4), and evaporate. Purify by silica gel chromatography (94% CH2Cl2/5% MeOH/1% NH4OH) to provide 7-(2-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-quinolin-4-ol as a white solid.
    • 2. 4-Chloro-7-(2-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-quinoline
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00057
  • Heat a mixture of 7-(2-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-quinolin-4-ol (50 mg, 0.17 mmol) in POCl3 (10 mL) at 90° C. for 16 hours. Evaporate the POCl3, and add ice (100 g) followed by careful addition of saturated NaHCO3. Extract with EtOAc, dry (Na2SO4), and evaporate to provide 4-chloro-7-(2-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-quinoline as a tan solid.
    • 3. (4-tert-Butyl-phenyl)-[7-(2-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-quinolin-4-yl]-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00058
  • Heat a mixture of 4-chloro-7-(2-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-quinoline (42 mg, 0.14 mmol) and 4-(tert-butyl)aniline (41 mg, 0.29 mmol) in 2-propanol (10 mL) at reflux for 3 hours. Evaporate the mixture, add 1M NaOH (10 mL), extract twice with EtOAc (10 mL each), dry (Na2SO4), and evaporate to provide the crude product. Purify by silica gel chromatography, eluting with 75% hexane-EtOAc to provide (4-tert-butyl-phenyl)-[7-(2-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-quinolin-4-yl]-amine as a white solid. Mass spec. 420.2.
  • B. 6-Methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-yl]-(4-trilfluoromethyl-phenyl)-amine is prepared by the following steps:
    • 1. 2-(1,2-Dimethoxy-ethylidene)-3-oxo-pentanedioic acid dimethyl ester
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00059
  • Dimethyl 1,3-acetonedicarboxylate (20.0 g, 115 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of 1,1,1,2-tetramethoxy-ethane (23.8 g, 158 mmol) and acetic anhydride (420 mL) and the solution is heated to reflux for 4 hours. The mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure. Toluene (200 mL) is added and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound.
    • 2. 4,6-Dihydroxy-2-methoxymethyl-nicotinic acid methyl ester
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00060
  • 2-(1,2-Dimethoxy-ethylidene)-3-oxo-pentanedioic acid dimethyl ester (29.8 g, 115 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of EtOH (250 mL), water (250 mL) and concentrated NH4OH(aq) (30 mL). The mixture is heated to 60° C. for 5 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and the EtOH removed under reduced pressure. The remaining aqueous solution is cooled in an ice bath and acidified with concentrated hydrochloric acid, at which time a white precipitate appeared. The precipitate is collected and dried in a vacuum oven to yield the title compound.
    • 3. 4,6-Dihydroxy-2-methoxymethyl-5-nitro-nicotinic acid methyl ester
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00061
  • 4,6-Dihydroxy-2-methoxymethyl-nicotinic acid methyl ester (15.9 g, 74.75 mmol) is dissolved in AcOH (60 mL) and cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath. Nitric acid (70%, 4.73 mL) is added dropwise. The resulting solution is stirred at room temperature overnight. Water (200 mL) is added to the mixture and a white precipitate forms. The precipitate is collected and dried in a vacuum oven to afford the title compound as a white solid.
    • 4. 6-Methoxymethyl-3-nitro-pyridine-2,4-diol
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00062
  • 4,6-Dihydroxy-2-methoxymethyl-5-nitro-nicotinic acid methyl ester (2.00 g, 7.75 mmol) is placed in concentrated hydrochloric acid (100 mL) and heated in a bomb at 120° C. overnight. The reaction mixture is cooled in an ice bath and poured onto ice (200 g). A white precipitate formed. The precipitate is collected and dried in a vacuum oven to afford the title compound.
    • 5. 2,4-Dichloro-6-methoxymethyl-3-nitro-pyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00063
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-3-nitro-pyridine-2,4-diol (725 mg, 3.63 mmol) is added to a solution of POCl3 (15 mL) at 0° C. The mixture is warmed to room temperature followed by heating at reflux for 5 hours. Excess POCl3 is removed under reduced pressure to yield a light brown oil. The crude oil is dissolved in CH2Cl2 (100 mL) and extracted with water (100 mL), NaHCO3 (100 mL), and brine (100 mL). The organic extract is dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is chromatographed on silica gel eluting with hexanes/EtOAc (4:1) to yield the title compound as a light yellow oil.
    • 6. 6-Methoxymethyl-3-nitro-pyridine-2,4-diamine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00064
  • A solution of saturated ammonia in methanol (20 mL) is added to 2,4-dichloro-6-methoxymethyl-3-nitro-pyridine (620 mg, 2.61 mmol). The mixture is stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. A white precipitate forms and is collected. The precipitate is dried in a vacuum oven to afford the title compound as a white solid.
    • 7. 6-Methoxymethyl-2,3,4-triamino-pyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00065
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-3-nitro-pyridine-2,4-diamine (455 mg, 2.29 mmol) is dissolved in EtOH (50 mL) and 10% Pd/C (50 mg) is added. The mixture is hydrogenated at 50 psi for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through Celite and the Celite bed washed with EtOH (25 mL). The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as an off-white solid.
    • 8. 6-Methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-ylamine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00066
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-2,3,4-triamino-pyridine (353 mg, 2.10 mmol), 2-bromo-1-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-ethanone hydrobromide (771 mg, 2.21 mmol; synthesis described in Example 2E, below), and NaHCO3 (554 mg, 6.59 mmol) are dissolved into a solution of dioxane (20 mL) and water (20 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred 1 hour at room temperature and 3 hours at 100° C. The mixture is cooled and filtered through Celite. The Celite bed is washed with EtOAc (20 mL). The aqueous mixture is extracted with EtOAc (4×100 mL). The combined organic extracts are washed with brine and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the crude product purified by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with acetone/hexanes (1:1) to yield the title compound as a white solid.
    • 9. 6-Methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-ol
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00067
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-ylamine (252 mg, 0.751 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of acetic acid (2 mL) and water (5 mL). The mixture is heated to 50° C. and sodium nitrite (362 mg, 5.26 mmol) is added in portions over 1 hour. The solution is warmed to 70° C. and stirred overnight. Water (20 mL) is added and the aqueous mixture is extracted with EtOAc (4×50 mL). The combined organic extracts are washed with brine and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is chromatographed on silica gel eluting with hexanes/acetone (1:1) to afford the title compound as a white solid.
    • 10. 8-Chloro-6-Methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00068
  • 6-Methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-ol (146 mg, 0.436 mmol) is dissolved in a solution of CHCl3 (20 mL), POCl3 (0.12 ml, 1.31 mmol) and 2,6-lutidine (0.2 mL, 1.31 mmol). The mixture is heated at reflux overnight. The reaction is concentrated under reduced pressure. EtOAc (30 mL) is added and the mixture is extracted with NaHCO3 (aq) (30 mL) and brine (30 mL). The organic extract is dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is purified by silica gel preparatory TLC eluting with hexanes/EtOAc (1:1) to yield the title compound as a light yellow oil that solidifies upon standing.
    • 11. 6-Methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-yl]-(4-trilfluoromethyl-phenyl)-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00069
  • To a solution of acetonitrile (2.5 mL) and 4-trifluoromethylaniline (42 mg, 0.263 mmol) is added 8-chloro-(6-methoxymethyl-3-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrido-[2,3-b]pyrazine (62 mg, 0.175 mmol) in acetonitrile (1 mL). The mixture is heated at 80° C. overnight. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the crude reaction mixture purified by silica gel preparatory TLC eluting with hexanes/acetone (2:1) to afford the title compound as a light yellow solid.
  • C. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,5-naphthyridin-4-amine is prepared according to the procedure shown in Scheme 7, as follows:
    • 1. 5-Amino-3-trifluoromethyl-[2,3′]bipyridinyl-6′-carbonitrile
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00070
  • Heat a solution of 6′-chloro-3-trifluoromethyl-[2,3′]bipyridinyl-5′-ylamine (25 g, 0.091 mol; prepared essentially as described in PCT International Application Publication Number WO 03/062209, published on Jul. 31, 2003), zinc cyanide (6.75 g, 0.058 mol), pd2(dba)3 (2.63 g, 2.86 mmol), DPPF (3.16 g, 5.72 mmol) in DMF (250 mL) and water (2.5 mL), under a nitrogen atmosphere, at 120° C. for 1 hour. Cool the reaction to 0° C. and add a solution of saturated ammonium chloride (200 ml), water (200 mL) and concentrated ammonium hydroxide (50 mL). After stirring at 0° C. for 1 hour, filter the yellow precipitate, and wash with water (200 mL) and a 1:1 mixture of ether-hexane (200 mL). Dry the solid in air and then in a vacuum oven to give the title compound.
    • 2. 5-Amino-3-trifluoromethyl-[2,3′]bipyridinyl-6′-carboxylic acid
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00071
  • Dissolve 5-amino-3-trifluoromethyl-[2,3′]bipyridinyl-6′-carbonitrile (5 g, 18.9 mmol) in 12M HCl (100 mL) and heat at 100° C. overnight. Remove the aqueous acid under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as its hydrochloride salt.
    • 3. Ethyl 5′-amino-3-trifluoromethyl-[2,3′]bipyridine-6′-carboxylate
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00072
  • Saturate a solution of 5-amino-3-trifluoromethyl-[2,3′]bipyridinyl-6′-carboxylic acid (5 g) in ethanol (100 ml) with hydrogen chloride gas. Heat the mixture at reflux for 4 days and evaporate to dryness. Partition the mixture between ethyl acetate and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. Separate the layers and extract the aqueous layer with further ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry (MgSO4) and evaporate to give the title compound.
    • 4. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridine-2,4-diol
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00073
  • Heat a solution of ethyl 5′-amino-3-trifluoromethyl-[2,3′]bipyridine-6′-carboxylate (10 mmol) and acetic anhydride (15 mL) in pyridine (15 mL) at 90° C. for 8 hours. Cool the mixture and evaporate to dryness. Add saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (30 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry and evaporate. Dissolve the solid in THF (30 mL) and add drop wise to a solution of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (6 g, 30 mmol) in toluene (60 mL) at −78° C. Allow the reaction to return to room temperature overnight. Add water (100 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate. Acidify the aqueous layer with hydrochloric acid and collect the precipitate by filtration. Air-dry to give the title compound.
    • 5. 2,4-Dichloro-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00074
  • Reflux 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridine-2,4-diol (1 g) for 18 hours in POCl3 (5 mL). Evaporate the solvent, then carefully neutralize with saturated NaHCO3 and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum to obtain the title compound.
    • 6. 4-Chloro-2-methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00075
  • Add sodium methoxide (4M, 0.45 mL, 1.8 mmol) to a solution of 2,4-dichloro-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,5-naphthyridine (575 mg, 1.6 mmol) in THF (10 mL). Stir at room temperature for 1 hour, add water (15 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry (MgSO4) and evaporate. Purify the residue by flash chromatography (elute with 1:2 hexane:ether) to give the title compound.
    • 7. 2-Methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00076
  • To a de-gassed mixture of 4-chloro-2-methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridine (1 mmol), cesium carbonate (2 mmol), 2-amino-trifluoromethylpyridine (1 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL) under nitrogen, add Pd2 dba3 (46 mg) and xantphos (29 mg). Stir the mixture at 100° C. for 3 hours, cool, add water (10 mL) and extract with EtOAc. Dry the combined extracts over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify by chromatography eluting with dichloromethane/methanol/ammonium hydroxide mixture to give the title compound. MS 435.98 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 8.95 (1H, d), 8.90 (1H, s), 8.58 (1H, s), 8.38 (1H, d), 8.30 (1H, s), 8.19 (1H, d), 8.06 (1H, s), 7.88 (1H, d), 7.55 (1H, m), 7.05 (1H, s), 4.16 (3H, s).
    • 8. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]amino}-[1,5]naphthyridin-2-ol
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00077
  • Heat a solution of 2-methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridin-4-amine (300 mg) in 33% hydrogen bromide in acetic acid (10 mL) at 100° C. for 18 hours. Evaporate to dryness, add saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (10 mL) and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum.
    • 9. 2-Chloro-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00078
  • Heat 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]amino}-[1,5]naphthyridin-2-ol (190 mg) and phosphorus oxychloride (3 mL) at reflux for 30 minutes. Evaporate to dryness, partition between ethyl acetate and saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and extract with EtOAc. Wash the combined extracts with brine and dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum to obtain the title compound. MS 469.93 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 9.04 (1H, s), 8.85 (1H, d), 8.60 (1H, s), 8.3-8.36 (2H, m), 8.18 (1H, d), 7.90-7.98 (2H, m), 7.58 (1H, m). 10. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00079
  • Stir a mixture of 2-chloro-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-[1,5]naphthyridin-4-amine (94 mg), ammonium formate (126 mg), 10% palladium on carbon (25 mg) in methanol (10 mL) at 50° C. for 2 hours. Cool, filter through Celite and evaporate to dryness. Purify by preparative thin layer chromatography, eluting with dichloromethane/methanol/ammonium hydroxide mixture to give the title compound. MS 436 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 8.95-8.93 (2H, m), 8.63-8.57 (2H, m), 8.34-8.32 (2H, m), 8.26 (1H, s), 8.18 (1H, dd), 7.91 (1H, dd), 7.57-7.52 (2H, m).
  • D. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinolin-4-amine is prepared according to the procedure shown in Scheme 8, as follows:
    • 1. 2-p-Tolyl-3-trifluoromethyl-pyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00080
  • To a de-gassed mixture of 2-chloro-3-(trifluoromethyl)-pyridine (70.1 mmol), p-tolylboronic acid (70.6 mmol), and 2M Na2CO3 (175.0 mmol), in DME (200 mL) under nitrogen, and add Pd(PPh3)4 (2.8 mmol). Stir the mixture at 80° C. overnight, concentrate, extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum, and pass through a silica gel pad to give the title compound.
    • 2. 2-(4-Methyl-3-nitro-phenyl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)-pyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00081
  • To a solution of 2-p-tolyl-3-trifluoromethyl-pyridine (8.4 mmol) in H2SO4 (6 mL) cautiously add fuming HNO3 (2 ml). Stir the mixture for 1 hour at room temperature. Pour the mixture onto ice-water (30 mL), extract with EtOAc, wash with 1 N NaOH, dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum to obtain the title compound.
    • 3. 2-Nitro-4-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-benzoic acid
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00082
  • To a solution of 2-(4-methyl-3-nitro-phenyl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)-pyridine (7.1 mmol) in a mixture of pyridine (10 mL) and water (5 ml) add KMnO4 (25.3 mmol) portion wise. Stir the mixture for 4 hours at 110° C. then add another 25.3 mmol of KMnO4 and 10 ml of water. Stir the mixture at 110° C. overnight. Cool to room temperature, filter through celite pad. Concentrate the filtrate under vacuum, dilute with water, and wash the aqueous with EtOAc. Neutralize the aqueous layer with 2 N HCl and collect the precipitate to give the title compound.
    • 4. 2-Nitro-4-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-benzoic acid methyl ester
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00083
  • Saturate a solution of 2-nitro-4-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-benzoic acid (5 g) in methanol (100 ml) with hydrogen chloride gas. Heat the mixture at reflux for 4 days and evaporate to dryness. Partition the mixture between ethyl acetate and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. Separate the layers and extract the aqueous layer with further ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry (MgSO4) and evaporate to give the title compound.
    • 5. 2-Amino-4-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-benzoic acid methyl ester
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00084
  • Hydrogenate, at 50 psi, a mixture of 10% Pd—C (150 mg) and 2-nitro-4-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-benzoic acid methyl ester (2 g) in 95% EtOH (100 mL). Filter through a celite pad and concentrate the filtrate to give the title compound.
    • 6. 4-Hydroxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-1H-quinolin-2-one
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00085
  • Heat a solution of 2-amino-4-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-benzoic acid methyl ester (296 mg, 1.0 mmol) and acetic acid (1 mL) in dioxane (2 mL) at 60° C. for 3 hours. Cool the mixture, add water (1 mL) and evaporate to dryness. Dissolve the solid in THF (4 mL) and add drop wise to a solution of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (600 mg, 3.0 mmol) in toluene (6 mL) at −78° C. Allow the reaction to return to room temperature overnight. Add water (10 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate. Acidify the aqueous layer with hydrochloric acid and collect the precipitate by filtration. Air-dry to give the title compound.
    • 7. 2,4-Dichloro-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-quinoline
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00086
  • Reflux 4-hydroxy-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-1H-quinolin-2-one (306 mg) for 18 hours in POCl3 (5 mL). Evaporate the solvent, then carefully neutralize with saturated NaHCO3, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum to obtain the title compound.
    • 8. 2-Chloro-4-methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinoline
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00087
  • Add sodium methoxide (4M, 1.1 mmol) to a solution of 2,4-dichloro-7-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-quinoline (1.0 mmol) in THF (10 mL). Stir at room temperature for 1 hour, add water (15 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate. Wash the combined organic extracts with brine, dry (MgSO4) and evaporate. Purify the mixture of 2-chloro-4-methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinoline and 4-chloro-2-methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinoline by flash chromatography (elute with 1:2 hexane:ether) to give the title compound.
    • 9. 4-Methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinoline
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00088
  • Stir a mixture of 2-chloro-4-methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinoline (111 mg), ammonium formate (190 mg), 10% palladium on carbon (30 mg) in methanol (10 mL) at room temperature for 2 hours. Cool, filter through Celite and evaporate to give the title compound.
    • 10. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinolin-4-ol
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00089
  • Heat a solution of 4-methoxy-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinoline (100 mg), in 33% hydrogen bromide in acetic acid (5 mL) at 100° C. for 18 hours. Evaporate to dryness to give the hydrobromide salt of the title compound.
    • 11. 4-Chloro-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinoline
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00090
  • Reflux 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinolin-4-ol (145 mg) for 2 hours in POCl3 (2 mL). Evaporate the solvent, then carefully neutralize with saturated NaHCO3, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum to obtain the title compound.
    • 12. 7-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinolin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00091
  • To a de-gassed mixture of 4-chloro-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]quinoline (0.5 mmol), cesium carbonate (1 mmol), 2-amino-trifluoromethylpyridine (0.5 mmol) in dioxane (5 mL) under nitrogen add Pd2 dba3 (23 mg) and xantphos (15 mg). Stir the mixture at 100° C. for 3 h, cool, add water (8 mL) and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify by chromatography eluting with dichloromethane/methanol/ammonium hydroxide mixture and triturate with ether/hexane to give the title compound. MS 435 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 8.73 (1H, d), 8.56 (1H, s), 8.51 (1H, s), 8.40 (2H, d), 8.11-8.09 (3H, m), 7.85 (1H, d), 7.67 (1H, d), 7.53 (1H, d), 7.47 (1H, dd).
  • E. 3-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-amine is prepared as shown in Scheme 9, as follows:
    • 1. 2-Bromo-1-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-ethanone
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00092
  • Dissolve 1-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-ethanone (2.10 g, 11.1 mmol) in HBr (30% by wt in AcOH) (14 mL). Cool the mixture to 0° C. and add bromine (0.62 mL) drop wise. Allow the resulting solution to warm to room temperature and stir for 3 hours. Concentrate the reaction under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as its HBr salt.
    • 2. 3-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00093
  • Dissolve 2,3,4-triaminopyridine (2.5 mmol) in water (20 mL). Add NaHCO3 (0.63 g, 7.5 mmol), dioxane (10 mL), and 2-bromo-1-(3-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-ethanone hydrobromide (0.5 g) and stir at 100° C. for 2 hours. Cool the mixture and extract with EtOAc (4×10 mL). Wash the combined organic extracts with brine and dry over Na2SO4. Purify the residue by preparative HPLC to give the title compound.
    • 3. 3-[3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00094
  • To a de-gassed mixture of 3-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-amine (72 mg, 0.25 mmol), cesium carbonate (162 mg, 0.5 mmol), 2-amino-trifluoromethyl pyridine (45 mg, 0.25 mmol) in dioxane (5 mL) under nitrogen, add Pd2 dba3 (11 mg) and xantphos (7 mg). Stir the mixture at 100° C. for 3 hours, cool, add water (10 mL) and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify by chromatography eluting with dichloromethane/methanol/ammonium hydroxide mixture to give the title compound. MS 437 (M+1). 1H NMR δ (CDCl3) 9.42 (1H, s), 9.28 (1H, s), 9.11 (1H, d), 8.95 (1H, d), 8.90 (1H, d), 8.72 (1H, s), 8.25 (1H, d), 7.89 (1H, d), 7.61 (1H, dd), 7.13 (1H, d).
  • F. 7-(3-Chloropyridin-2-yl)-N-(5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl)-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine
    • 1. tert-Butyl 4-chloropyridin-2-ylcarbamate
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00095
  • Dissolve azido(4-chloropyridin-2-yl)methanone (1.5 g, 0.008216 moles, prepared essentially as described by Sundberg and Jiang (1997) Org. Prep. Proced. Int. 29:117-122) in toluene (20.0 mL) and heat at 55° C. for 2.0 hours. Add t-butanol (1.96 mL, 0.02054 moles) to the reaction mixture and continue heating at 80° C. for 24 hours. Cool the mixture and concentrate under reduced pressure to afford a residue. Dissolve the residue in EtOAc/1.0 N aq. NaOH (50.0 mL each). Separate the organic layer, extract the aqueous solution with EtOAc (3×20.0 mL), wash the EtOAc with brine, dry (MgSO4) and concentrate under reduced pressure to afford a red colored solid. Purify the crude product by flash column chromatography using 5% EtOAc/hexane to afford the title product as a white solid.
    • 2. tert-Butyl 4-chloro-3-formylpyridin-2-ylcarbamate
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00096
  • Dissolve tert-butyl 4-chloropyridin-2-ylcarbamate (1.95 g, 0.00855 moles) in dry THF (50 mL) and cool to −78° C. under nitrogen atmosphere. Add dropwise 1.6 M n-BuLi/hexane (12.8 mL, 0.02053 moles) over a period of 15 minutes while maintaining the reaction temperature below −70° C. Stir the resulting red orange solution at −78° C. for 2 hours. Add DMF (3.3 mL, 0.04275 moles) dropwise to the reaction mixture while maintaining the reaction temperature below −70° C. Stir further at −78° C. for 2 hours and then quench the reaction mixture with saturated ammonium chloride (50 mL). Warm the reaction mixture to room temperature, extract with EtOAc (3×50 mL) and dry with MgSO4. Filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to afford a yellow viscous oil. Purify the crude product by flash column chromatography using 15-20% EtOAc/hexane to afford the title product as a white solid.
    • 3. 2-Amino-4-chloronicotinaldehyde
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00097
  • Dissolve tert-butyl 4-chloro-3-formylpyridin-2-ylcarbamate (1.6 g, 6.2 mmol) in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (50 mL) under N2 atmosphere. Add dropwise trifluoroacetic acid (2.4 mL, 31.0 mmol) to the reaction mixture and stir at room temperature overnight. Add saturated aq. sodium carbonate (50 mL) to the reaction mixture, separate the organic layer, extract the aq. layer with CH2Cl2 (2×20 mL) and dry with MgSO4. Filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to afford the title product as a yellow solid.
    • 4. 5-Chloro-2-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00098
  • Dissolve 2-amino-4-chloronicotinaldehyde (312 mg, 2.0 mmol) and 2-acetyl-3-chloropyridine (310 mg, 2.0 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5.0 mL) and cool it to −20° C. under N2 atmosphere. Add in portion t-BuOK (448 mg, 4.0 mmol) to the reaction mixture and stir the mixture at 10° C. for 2 hours. Concentrate the reaction mixture under vacuum, dilute the residue with water (10 mL), filter the solid, wash the solid with water and dry under high vacuum to afford the title product as a yellow solid.
    • 5. 7-(3-Chloropyridin-2-yl)-N-(5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00099
  • Heat a mixture of 5-chloro-2-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine (82.5 mg, 0.3 mmol) and 2-amino-5-trifluoromethylpyridine (97.2 mg, 0.6 mmol) at 180° C. for 2.0 hours. Cool the mixture, dilute with EtOAc/1.0 N aq. NaOH (5.0 mL each), and separate the organic layer, extract the aq. layer with EtOAc (2×5 mL) and dry the combined organic layers with MgSO4. Filter the dried extract and concentrate under vacuum to afford crude product. Purify by column chromatography using EtOAc to 2% MeOH/EtOAc as eluents to afford title compound as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHZ, DMSO-D6) δ 10.2 (s, 1H), 9.07 (d, 1H, J=1.9 Hz), 8.93 (d, 1H, J=1.2 Hz), 8.68 (m, 2H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 8.08 (m, 2H), 7.96 (d, 1H, J=2.2 Hz), 7.56 (dd, 1H), 7.46 (d, 1H, J=2.2 Hz). MS=402.22 (M+H).
  • G. 7-(3-Methylpyridin-2-yl)-N-(5-(trifluoromethyl)pyrimidin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-amine
    • 1. 5-Chloro-2-(3-methylpyridin-2-yl)-1,8-naphthyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00100
  • Dissolve 2-amino-4-chloronicotinaldehyde (156 mg, 1.0 mmol) and 2-acetyl-3-methylpyridine (136 mg, 1.0 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5.0 mL) and cool it to −20° C. under N2 atmosphere. Add in portion t-BuOK (224 mg, 2.0 mmol) to the reaction mixture and stir the mixture at 10° C. for 2 hours. Concentrate the reaction mixture under vacuum, dilute the residue with water (10 mL), filter the solid, wash the solid with water and dry under high vacuum to afford the title product as a yellow colored solid.
    • 2. 7-(3-Methylpyridin-2-yl)-N-(5-(trifluoromethyl)pyrimidin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00101
  • Heat a mixture of 5-chloro-2-(3-methylpyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine (51 mg, 0.2 mmol), 2-amino-5-trifluoromethylpyrimidine (42.0 mg, 0.25 mmol), xantphos (11.6 mg, 0.02 mmol), Pd2(dba)3 (18.3 mg, 0.02 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (130 mg, 0.4 mmol) in dioxane (2.0 mL) at 100° C. for 20 hours. Cool the mixture, concentrate under vacuum, dilute with EtOAc/water (5.0 mL each), filter through celite, wash celite with EtOAc (2×5 mL) and dry the combined organic layers with MgSO4. Filter the dried extract and concentrate under vacuum to afford the crude product. Purify by column chromatography using EtOAc as eluent to afford the title compound as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHZ, DMSO-D6) δ 10.92 (s, 1H), 9.0 (m, 3H), 8.92 (d, 1H, J=1.8 Hz), 8.58 (d, 1H, J=1.0 Hz), 8.12 (m, 2H), 7.80 (d, 1H, J=2.1 Hz), 7.41 (dd, 1H), 2.65 (s, 3H). MS=383.3 (M+H).
  • H. 7-(3-Methylpyridin-2-yl)-N-(5-(trifluoromethyl)pyrazin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00102
  • Heat a mixture of 5-chloro-2-(3-methylpyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine (51 mg, 0.2 mmol), 2-amino-5-trifluoromethylpyrazine (42.0 mg, 0.25 mmol), xantphos (11.6 mg, 0.02 mmol), Pd2(dba)3 (18.3 mg, 0.02 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (130 mg, 0.4 mmol) in dioxane (2.0 mL) at 100° C. for 20 hours. Cool the mixture, concentrate under vacuum, dilute with EtOAc/water (5.0 mL each), filter through celite, wash celite with EtOAc (2×5 mL) and dry the combined organic layers with MgSO4. Filter the dried extract and concentrate under vacuum to afford the crude product. Purify by preparative TLC using 2% MeOH/EtOAc as eluent to afford the title compound as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHZ, DMSO-D6) δ 10.6 (s, 1H), 9.04 (d, 1H, J=2.1 Hz), 9.0 (s, 1H), 8.77 (s, 2H), 8.59 (d, 1H, J=1.6 Hz), 8.4 (s, 1H), 8.20 (d, 1H, J=2.2 Hz), 7.81 (d, 1H, J=1.9 Hz), 7.42 (dd, 1H), 2.65 (s, 3H). MS=383.11 (M+H).
  • I. 7-(3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl)-N-(5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl)-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine
    • 1. 5-Chloro-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00103
  • Dissolve 2-amino-4-chloronicotinaldehyde (78 mg, 0.5 mmol) and 2-acetyl-3-trifluoromethylpyridine (95 mg, 0.5 mmol) in anhydrous THF (2.0 mL) and cool it to −20° C. under N2 atmosphere. Add in portion t-BuOK (112 mg, 1.0 mmol) to the reaction mixture and stir the mixture at 10° C. for 2 hours. Concentrate the reaction mixture under vacuum, dilute the residue with saturated aq. ammonium chloride (10 mL), filter the solid, wash the solid with water and dry under high vacuum to afford desired product as a cream colored solid.
    • 2. 7-(3-(Trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl)-N-(5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridin-4-amine
  • Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00104
  • Heat a mixture of 5-chloro-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl)-[1,8]naphthyridine (62 mg, 0.2 mmol), 2-amino-5-trifluoromethylpyridine (32.4 mg, 0.2 mmol), xantphos (11.6 mg, 0.02 mmol), Pd2(dba)3 (18.3 mg, 0.02 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (130 mg, 0.4 mmol) in dioxane (2.0 mL) at 100° C. for 20 hours. Cool the mixture, concentrate under vacuum, dilute with EtOAc/water (5.0 mL each), filter through celite, wash celite with EtOAc (2×5 mL) and dry combined organic layers with MgSO4. Filter the dried extract and concentrate under vacuum to afford crude product. Purify by preparative TLC using EtOAc as eluent to afford title compound as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHZ, DMSO-D6) δ 10.15 (s, 1H), 9.1 (d, 1H, J=2.2 Hz), 9.0 (d, 1H, J=1.1 Hz), 8.95 (d, 1H, J=1.2 Hz), 8.68 (s, 1H), 8.50 (d, 1H, J=1.3 Hz), 8.43 (d, 1H, J=2.0 Hz), 8.12 (dd, 1H), 8.0 (d, 1H, J=2.2 Hz), 7.81 (m, 1H), 7.49 (d, 1H, J=2.2 Hz). MS=436.08 (M+H).
    • Example 3 Additional Representative Substituted Quinolin-4-ylamine Analogues
  • Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein. Compounds listed in Table I were prepared using such methods. In the column labeled “IC50” a * indicates that the IC50 determined as described in Example 6 is 1 micromolar or less (i.e., the concentration of such compounds that is required to provide a 50% decrease in the fluorescence response of cells exposed to one IC50 of capsaicin is 1 micromolar or less).
  • TABLE 1
    Ret. MS
    Compound Name IC50 Time (M + 1)
    1
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00105
         		2-methyl-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.19 448.15
    2
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00106
         		2-Methoxymethyl-7-(3- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)- [1,8]naphthyridin-4-yl]-(4- trifluoromethylphenyl)-amine * 1.17 479.16
    3
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00107
         		2-Methoxymethyl-7-(3- trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)- [1,8]naphthyridin-4-yl]-(4-t- butylphenyl)-amine * 1.21 467.2
    4
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00108
         		methyl 2-(methoxymethyl)-4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridine-3-carboxylate * 1.23 537.23
    5
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00109
         		{4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2-yl}methanol * 1.14 465.2
    6
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00110
         		2-(methoxymethyl)-4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid * 1.21 523.22
    7
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00111
         		2-(isobutoxymethyl)-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.24 521.25
    8
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00112
         		N-(4-chlorophenyl)-2- (methoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.16 445.19
    9
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00113
         		N-(4-fluorophenyl)-2- (methoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.14 429.21
    10
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00114
         		N-(4-chloro-3-fluorophenyl)-2- (methoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.17 463.19
    11
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00115
         		4-({2-(methoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4- yl}amino)benzonitrile * 1.1 436.22
    12
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00116
         		5-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-2-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]furo[3,4-b]-1,8-naphthyridin- 6(8H)-one * 1.24 491.15
    13
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00117
         		N-[4-(isopropylsulfonyl)phenyl]-2- (methoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.11 517.29
    14
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00118
         		2-(methoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.18 480.25
    15
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00119
         		2-(methoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-{4- [(trifluoromethyl)sulfonyl]phenyl}- 1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.17 543.24
    16
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00120
         		N-(4,4-dimethyl-1,2,3,4- tetrahydroquinolin-7-yl)-2- (methoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.18 494.37
    17
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00121
         		2-(methoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N- (2,4,4-trimethyl-1,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinolin-7-yl)-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.06 508.39
    18
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00122
         		2-isobutoxy-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.26 506.26
    19
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00123
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2-isobutoxy- 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.28 494.32
    20
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00124
         		2-chloro-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.34 468.17
    21
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00125
         		4-[(4-tert-butylphenyl)amino]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-2-ol * 1.29 438.27
    22
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00126
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2-chloro-7- [3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.36 456.23
    23
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00127
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2-morpholin- 4-yl-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.24 507.24
    24
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00128
         		2-{[(2R,6S)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin- 4-yl]methyl}-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.19 562.23
    25
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00129
         		2-{[2- (dimethylamino)ethoxy]methyl}-N- [4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-{3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.1 536.22
    26
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00130
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2-piperidin-1- yl-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.28 505.25
    27
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00131
         		N~2~butyl-N~4~-(4-tert- butylphenyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinoline-2,4-diamine * 1.29 493.28
    28
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00132
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2-pyrrolidin- 1-yl-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.26 491.25
    29
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00133
         		N~4~-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-N~2~- isopentyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinoline-2,4-diamine * 1.31 507.29
    30
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00134
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2-ethoxy-7- [3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.24 466.31
    31
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00135
         		4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2-ol * 1.24 451.22
    32
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00136
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2- (isopentyloxy)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.3 508.36
    33
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00137
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2-propoxy-7- [3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.26 480.32
    34
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00138
         		2-chloro-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.3 469.18
    35
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00139
         		N-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 435.35
    36
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00140
         		2-ethoxy-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.28 479.22
    37
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00141
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2-ethoxy-7- [3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.26 467.29
    38
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00142
         		2-ethoxy-N-(4-isopropylphenyl)-7- [3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.24 453.27
    39
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00143
         		2-methyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.17 450.21
    40
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00144
         		2-(ethoxymethyl)-N-[4- (trilfuoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.2 493.18
    41
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00145
         		2-(isopropoxymethyl)-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trilfuoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.22 507.19
    42
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00146
         		2-[(isopentyloxy)methyl]-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.26 535.23
    43
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00147
         		2-(propoxymethyl)-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.22 507.19
    44
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00148
         		2-(isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.27 522.19
    45
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00149
         		2-ethoxy-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.32 480.15
    46
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00150
         		2-ethoxy-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-{4- [(trifluoromethyl)sulfonyl]phenyl}- 1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.31 543.15
    47
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00151
         		N-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-2-methoxy-7- [3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.25 453.2
    48
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00152
         		2-methyl-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.18 449.16
    49
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00153
         		2-[(2-methylpyrrolidin-1-yl)methyl]- N-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.19 532.26
    50
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00154
         		2-{[bis(2- methoxyethyl)amino]methyl}-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.2 580.28
    51
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00155
         		7-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2- (methoxymethyl)-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.17 445.17
    52
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00156
         		7-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2- (isobutoxymethyl)-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.25 487.23
    53
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00157
         		2-(4-{[7-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2- (methoxymethyl)-1,8-naphthyridin- 4-yl]amino}phenyl)propan-2-ol * 1.13 435.22
    54
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00158
         		N-(4-fluorophenyl)-2- (isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.22 471.25
    55
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00159
         		2-(azetidin-1-ylmethyl)-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.18 504.23
    56
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00160
         		1-[4-({2-(isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4- yl}amino)phenyl]ethanone * 495.27
    57
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00161
         		2-[4-({2-(isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4- yl}amino)phenyl]propan-2-ol * 1.21 511.3
    58
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00162
         		2-[(isopropylamino)methyl]-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.19 506.22
    59
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00163
         		2-[(isobutylamino)methyl]-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.19 520.24
    60
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00164
         		2-{[isobutyl(methyl)amino]methyl}- N-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.21 534.26
    61
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00165
         		N-(5-bromopyridin-2-yl)-2- (isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.27 532.15
    62
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00166
         		7-(3-fluoropyriidn-2-yl)-2- (methoxymethyl)-N-[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.16 429.16
    63
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00167
         		1-(4-{[7-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2- (isobutoxymethyl)-1,8-naphthyridin- 4-yl]amino}phenyl)ethanone * 1.2 461.21
    64
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00168
         		2-(4-{[7-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2- (isobutoxymethyl)-1,8-naphthyridin- 4-yl]amino}phenyl)propan-2-ol * 1.21 477.25
    65
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00169
         		2-(isobutoxymethyl)-N-[4- (methylsulfonyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.15 531.2
    66
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00170
         		1-{[4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2-yl}methoxy)propan- 2-ol * 1.18 523.19
    67
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00171
         		1-({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2-yl}methoxy)acetone * 1.17 521.17
    68
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00172
         		4-({2-(isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)-N,N- dimethylbenzenesulfonamide * 1.19 560.25
    69
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00173
         		N-{[4-({2-(isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4- yl}amino)phenyl]sulfonyl}acetamide 1.16 574.28
    70
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00174
         		N-methyl-N-({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2- yl}methyl)methanesulfonamide * 1.17 556.22
    71
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00175
         		N-methyl-N-({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2- yl}methyl)ethanesulfonamide * 1.18 570.24
    72
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00176
         		2-Iisobutoxymethyl)-N-[4- (isopropylsulfonyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.19 559.29
    73
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00177
         		2-(isobutoxymethyl)-N-[4- (propylsulfonyl)phenyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.19 559.3
    74
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00178
         		2-(isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-{4- [(trifluoromethyl)sulfonyl]phenyl}- 1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.24 585.24
    75
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00179
         		N,2-dimethyl-N-({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2- yl}methyl)propanamide * 1.18 548.19
    76
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00180
         		N-methyl-N-({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2-yl}methyl)glycine * 1.17 495.15
    77
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00181
         		3-[ethyl({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2- yl}methyl)amino]propan-1-ol * 1.19 550.05
    78
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00182
         		3-[isopropyl({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2- yl}methyl)amino]propan-1-ol * 1.19 564.06
    79
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00183
         		3-[propyl({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2- yl}methyl)amino]propan-1-ol * 1.21 564.05
    80
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00184
         		N-isobutyl-N-({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2- yl}methyl)methanesulfonamide * 1.22 597.99
    81
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00185
         		N-isobutyl-N-({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2-yl}methyl)glycine *
    82
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00186
         		2-methyl-1-({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2-yl}methoxy)propan- 2-ol * 1.19 537.17
    83
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00187
         		2-(isobutoxymethyl)-N-(5- methylpyridin-2-yl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.24 468.2
    84
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00188
         		2-(isobutoxymethyl)-N-pyridin-2-yl- 7-[3-(tirlfuoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]- 1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.21 454.19
    85
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00189
         		2-[6-({2-(isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)pyridin-2- yl]propan-2-ol * 1.21 512.23
    86
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00190
         		2-methyl-3-({4-{[4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]amino}-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-2-yl}methoxy)butan-2- ol * 1.21 551.2
    87
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00191
         		6-({2-(isobutoxymethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4- yl}amino)nicotinonitrile * 1.22 479.19
    88
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00192
         		(7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]- 4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridin-2- yl)methanol * 1.16 466.12
    89
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00193
         		2-[(dimethylamino)methyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.15 493.17
    90
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00194
         		rel-2-{[(2R,6S)-2,6- dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl}-7- [3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N- [5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.2 563.22
    91
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00195
         		2-(morpholin-4-ylmethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.17 535.19
    92
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00196
         		2-(piperidin-1-ylmethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.17 533.21
    93
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00197
         		2-[(2-methylpyrrolidin-1-yl)methyl]- 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N- [5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.18 533.2
    94
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00198
         		2-[(diethylamino)methyl]-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.19 521.2
    95
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00199
         		2-(pyrrolidin-1-ylmethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.19 519.19
    96
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00200
         		2-methoxy-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.31 466.12
    97
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00201
         		7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4- {[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridin-2-ol * 1.26 452.08
    98
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00202
         		2-cyclobutyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.25 490.14
    99
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00203
         		2-cyclobutyl-N-(5-methylpyridin-2- yl)-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.2 436.18
    100
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00204
         		6-({2-cyclobutyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4- yl}amino)nicotinonitrile * 1.19 447.16
    101
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00205
         		N-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2- cylcobutyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphtyridin-4-amine * 1.23 456.13
    102
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00206
         		2-isopropyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.24 478.15
    103
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00207
         		2-isopropyl-N-(5-methylpyridin-2- yl)-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.19 424.17
    104
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00208
         		6-({2-isopropyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4- yl}amino)nicotinonitrile * 1.17 435.16
    105
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00209
         		N-(5-chloropyriidn-2-yl)-2- isopropyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.22 444.12
    106
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00210
         		7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N- [5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.16 436.12
    107
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00211
         		2-methoxy-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,5- naphthyriidn-4-amine 1.2 466.16
    108
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00212
         		7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N- [5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,5- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.29 436.14
    109
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00213
         		7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N- [5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]quinolin-4-amine * 1.19 435.15
    110
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00214
         		2-ethyl-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin- 2-yl]-N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.2 464.16
    111
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00215
         		1-[6-({2-ethyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)pyridin-3- yl]ethanone * 1.16 438.19
    112
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00216
         		2-[6-({2-ethyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)pyridin-3- yl]propan-2-ol * 1.16 454.25
    113
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00217
         		3-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N- [5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazin-8-amine * 1.23 437.12
    114
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00218
         		2-propyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.25 478.16
    115
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00219
         		1-[6-({2-propyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)pyridin-3- yl]ethanone * 1.19 452.19
    116
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00220
         		1-[6-({2-isopropyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)pyridin-3- yl]ethanone * 1.18 452.2
    117
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00221
         		2-[6-({2-propyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)pyridin-3- yl]propan-2-ol * 1.19 468.24
    118
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00222
         		2-[6-({2-isopropyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)pyridin-3- yl]propan-2-ol * 1.18 468.22
    119
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00223
         		2-(1-methoxyethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.23 494.17
    120
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00224
         		1-[6-({2-(1-methoxyethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)pyridin-3- yl]ethanone * 1.17 468.2
    121
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00225
         		2-[6-({2-(1-methoxyethyl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-yl}amino)pyridin-3- yl]propan-2-ol * 1.15 484.24
    122
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00226
         		N-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2-propyl-7- [3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.24 444.13
    123
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00227
         		N-[5-(methylsulfonyl)pyridin-2-yl]-2- propyl-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin- 2-yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.16 488.15
    124
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00228
         		2-(1-methylpiperidin-3-yl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 1.2 533.19
    125
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00229
         		7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4- {[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridine-2- carbonitrile * 1.31 461.11
    126
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00230
         		7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4- {[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridine-2- carboxamide *
    127
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00231
         		7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-4- {[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridine-2- carboxylic acid
    128
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00232
         		N-(5-ethylpyridin-2-yl)-2-propyl-7- [3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    129
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00233
         		2-morpholin-4-yl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine * 521.1
    130
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00234
         		N~2~-isobutyl-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N~4~- [5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridine-2,4-diamine * 507.1
    131
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00235
         		N-[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyrazin-2-yl]- 7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]- 1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 437.04
    132
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00236
         		7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N- [5-(trifluoromethyl)pyrimidin-2-yl]- 1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine * 437.04
    133
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00237
         		1-(7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]-4-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]amino}-1,8-naphthyridin-2- yl)ethanone *
    134
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00238
         		N-[6-(trifluoromethyl)pyridazin-3- yl]-7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2- yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4-amine
    135
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00239
         		7-(3-methylpyridin-2-yl)-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    136
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00240
         		7-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    137
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00241
         		7-(3-methylpyridin-2-yl)-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyrimidin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    138
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00242
         		7-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyrazin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    139
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00243
         		N-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    140
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00244
         		N-(5-methylpyridin-2-yl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    141
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00245
         		1-[6-({7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin- 2-yl]-1,8-naphthyridin-4- yl]amino)pyridin-3-yl]ethanone *
    142
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00246
         		7-[3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-N- [6-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    143
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00247
         		N-(5-ethylpyridin-2-yl)-7-[3- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    144
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00248
         		7-(3-methylpyridin-2-yl)-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyrazin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    145
    Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00249
         		7-(3-chloropyridin-2-yl)-N-[5- (trifluoromethyl)pyrimidin-2-yl]-1,8- naphthyridin-4-amine *
    • Example 4 VR1-Transfected Cells and Membrane Preparations
  • This Example illustrates the preparation of VR1-transfected cells and membrane preparations for use in binding assays (Example 5) and functional assays (Example 6).
  • A cDNA encoding full length human capsaicin receptor (SEQ ID NO:1, 2 or 3 of U.S. Pat. No. 6,482,611) was subcloned in the plasmid pBK-CMV (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) for recombinant expression in mammalian cells.
  • Human embryonic kidney (HEK293) cells were transfected with the pBK-CMV expression construct encoding the full length human capsaicin receptor using standard methods. The transfected cells were selected for two weeks in media containing G418 (400 μg/ml) to obtain a pool of stably transfected cells. Independent clones were isolated from this pool by limiting dilution to obtain clonal stable cell lines for use in subsequent experiments.
  • For radioligand binding experiments, cells were seeded in T175 cell culture flasks in media without antibiotics and grown to approximately 90% confluency. The flasks were then washed with PBS and harvested in PBS containing 5 mM EDTA. The cells were pelleted by gentle centrifugation and stored at −80° C. until assayed.
  • Previously frozen cells were disrupted with the aid of a tissue homogenizer in ice-cold HEPES homogenization buffer (5 mM KCl 5, 5.8 mM NaCl, 0.75 mM CaCl2, 2 mM MgCl2, 320 mM sucrose, and 10 mM HEPES pH 7.4). Tissue homogenates were first centrifuged for 10 minutes at 1000×g (4° C.) to remove the nuclear fraction and debris, and then the supernatant from the first centrifugation is further centrifuged for 30 minutes at 35,000×g (4° C.) to obtain a partially purified membrane fraction. Membranes were resuspended in the HEPES homogenization buffer prior to the assay. An aliquot of this membrane homogenate is used to determine protein concentration via the Bradford method (BIO-RAD Protein Assay Kit, #500-0001, BIO-RAD, Hercules, Calif.).
    • Example 5 Capsaicin Receptor Binding Assay
  • This Example illustrates a representative assay of capsaicin receptor binding that may be used to determine the binding affinity of compounds for the capsaicin (VR1) receptor.
  • Binding studies with [3H] Resiniferatoxin (RTX) are carried out essentially as described by Szallasi and Blumberg (1992) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ter. 262:883-888. In this protocol, non-specific RTX binding is reduced by adding bovine alpha1 acid glycoprotein (100 g per tube) after the binding reaction has been terminated.
  • [3H] RTX (37 Ci/mmol) is synthesized by and obtained from the Chemical Synthesis and Analysis Laboratory, National Cancer Institute-Frederick Cancer Research and Development Center, Frederick, Md. [3H] RTX may also be obtained from commercial vendors (e.g., Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Inc.; Piscataway, N.J.).
  • The membrane homogenate of Example 4 is centrifuged as before and resuspended to a protein concentration of 333 μg/ml in homogenization buffer. Binding assay mixtures are set up on ice and contain [3H]RTX (specific activity 2200 mCi/ml), 2 μl non-radioactive test compound, 0.25 mg/ml bovine serum albumin (Cohn fraction V), and 5×104−1×105 VR1-transfected cells. The final volume is adjusted to 500 μl (for competition binding assays) or 1,000 μl (for saturation binding assays) with the ice-cold HEPES homogenization buffer solution (pH 7.4) described above. Non-specific binding is defined as that occurring in the presence of 1 μM non-radioactive RTX (Alexis Corp.; San Diego, Calif.). For saturation binding, [3H]RTX is added in the concentration range of 7-1,000 pM, using 1 to 2 dilutions. Typically 11 concentration points are collected per saturation binding curve.
  • Competition binding assays are performed in the presence of 60 pM [3H]RTX and various concentrations of test compound. The binding reactions are initiated by transferring the assay mixtures into a 37° C. water bath and are terminated following a 60 minute incubation period by cooling the tubes on ice. Membrane-bound RTX is separated from free, as well as any alpha1-acid glycoprotein-bound RTX, by filtration onto WALLAC glass fiber filters (PERKIN-ELMER, Gaithersburg, Md.) which were pre-soaked with 1.0% PEI (polyethyleneimine) for 2 hours prior to use. Filters are allowed to dry overnight then counted in a WALLAC 1205 BETA PLATE counter after addition of WALLAC BETA SCINT scintillation fluid.
  • Equilibrium binding parameters are determined by fitting the allosteric Hill equation to the measured values with the aid of the computer program FIT P (Biosoft, Ferguson, Mo.) as described by Szallasi, et al. (1993) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 266:678-683. Compounds provided herein generally exhibit Ki values for capsaicin receptor of less than 1 μM, 100 nM, 50 nM, 25 nM, 10 nM, or 1 nM in this assay.
    • Example 6 Calcium Mobilization Assay
  • This Example illustrates a representative calcium mobilization assay for use in monitoring the response of cells expressing capsaicin receptor to capsaicin and other vanilloid ligands of the capsaicin receptor, as well as for evaluating test compounds for agonist and antagonist activity.
  • Cells transfected with expression plasmids (as described in Example 4) and thereby expressing human capsaicin receptor are seeded and grown to 70-90% confluency in FALCON black-walled, clear-bottomed 96-well plates (#3904, BECTON-DICKINSON, Franklin Lakes, N.J.). The culture medium is emptied from the 96 well plates and FLUO-3 AM calcium sensitive dye (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.) is added to each well (dye solution: 1 mg FLUO-3 AM, 440 μL DMSO and 440 μl 20% pluronic acid in DMSO, diluted 1:250 in Krebs-Ringer HEPES (KRH) buffer (25 mM HEPES, 5 mM KCl, 0.96 mM NaH2PO4, 1 mM MgSO4, 2 mM CaCl2, 5 mM glucose, 1 mM probenecid, pH 7.4), 501 diluted solution per well). Plates are covered with aluminum foil and incubated at 37° C. for 1-2 hours in an environment containing 5% CO2. After the incubation, the dye is emptied from the plates, and the cells are washed once with KRH buffer, and resuspended in KRH buffer.
  • Agonist (e.g., olvanil, capsaicin, or RTX)-induced calcium mobilization is monitored using either FLUOROSKAN ASCENT (Labsystems, Franklin, Mass.) or FLIPR (fluorometric imaging plate reader system, Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, Calif.) instruments. Varying concentrations of the antagonists ruthenium red or capsazepine (RBI; Natick, Mass.) are added to cells concurrently with agonist (e.g., 25-50 nM capsaicin). For agonist-induced calcium responses, data obtained between 30 and 60 seconds after agonist application are used to generate the IC50 values. KALEIDAGRAPH software (Synergy Software, Reading, Pa.) is used to fit the data to the equation:

  • y=a*(1/(1+(b/x)c))
  • to determine the IC50 for the response. In this equation, y is the maximum fluorescence signal, x is the concentration of the agonist or antagonist, a is the Emax, b corresponds to the IC50 value and c is the Hill coefficient.
  • To measure the ability of a test compound to antagonize (inhibit) the response of cells expressing capsaicin receptors to capsaicin or other vanilloid agonist, the IC50 of capsaicin is first determined. An additional 20 μl of KRH buffer and 1 μl DMSO is added to each well of cells, prepared as described above. 100 μl capsaicin in KRH buffer is automatically transferred by the FLIPR instrument to each well. An 8-point concentration response curve, with final capsaicin concentrations of 1 nM to 3 μM, is used to determine capsaicin IC50.
  • Test compounds are dissolved in DMSO, diluted in 20 μl KRH buffer so that the final concentration of test compounds in the assay well is between 1 μM and 5 μM, and added to cells prepared as described above. The 96 well plates containing prepared cells and test compounds are incubated in the dark, at room temperature for 0.5 to 6 hours. It is important that the incubation not continue beyond 6 hours. Just prior to determining the fluorescence response, 100 μl capsaicin in KRH buffer at twice the IC50 concentration determined from the concentration response curve is automatically added by the FLIPR instrument to each well of the 96 well plate for a final sample volume of 200 μl and a final capsaicin concentration equal to the IC50. The final concentration of test compounds in the assay wells is between 1 μM and 5 μM. Typically cells exposed to one IC50 of capsaicin exhibit a fluorescence response of about 10,000 Relative Fluorescence Units. Antagonists of the capsaicin receptor decrease this response by at least about 20%, preferably by at least about 50%, and most preferably by at least 80% as compared to matched control. The concentration of antagonist required to provide a 50% decrease is the IC50 for the antagonist, and is preferably below 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar.
  • The ability of a compound to act as an agonist of the capsaicin receptor is determined by measuring the fluorescence response of cells expressing capsaicin receptors, using the methods described above, in the absence of capsaicin, RTX, or other capsaicin receptor agonists. Compounds that cause cells to exhibit fluorescence above background are capsaicin receptor agonists. Certain preferred compounds of the present invention are antagonists that are essentially free of agonist activity as demonstrated by the absence of detectable agonist activity in such an assay at compound concentrations below 4 nM, more preferably at concentrations below 10 μM and most preferably at concentrations less than or equal to 100 μM.
    • Example 7 Microsomal In Vitro Half-Life
  • This Example illustrates the evaluation of compound half-life values (t1/2 values) using a representative liver microsomal half-life assay.
  • Pooled human liver microsomes are obtained from XenoTech LLC, 3800 Cambridge St., Kansas City, Kans. 66103 (catalog #H0610). Such liver microsomes may also be obtained from In Vitro Technologies (Baltimore, Md.) or Tissue Transformation Technologies (Edison, N.J.). Six test reactions are prepared, each containing 25 μL microsomes, 5 μL of a 100 μM solution of test compound, and 399 μL 0.1 M phosphate buffer (19 mL 0.1 M NaH2PO4, 81 mL 0.1 M Na2HPO4, adjusted to pH 7.4 with H3PO4). A seventh reaction is prepared as a positive control containing 25 μL microsomes, 399 μL 0.1 M phosphate buffer, and 5 μL of a 100 μM solution of a compound with known metabolic properties (e.g., DIAZEPAM or CLOZAPINE). Reactions are preincubated at 39° C. for 10 minutes.
  • CoFactor Mixture is prepared by diluting 16.2 mg NADP and 45.4 mg Glucose-6-phosphate in 4 mL 100 mM MgCl2. Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase solution is prepared by diluting 214.3 μL glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase suspension (Boehringer-Manheim catalog no. 0737224, distributed by Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Indianapolis, Ind.) into 1285.7 μL distilled water. 71 μL Starting Reaction Mixture (3 mL CoFactor Mixture; 1.2 mL Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase solution) is added to 5 of the 6 test reactions and to the positive control. 71 μL 100 mM MgCl2 is added to the sixth test reaction, which is used as a negative control. At each time point (0, 1, 3, 5, and 10 minutes), 75 μL of each reaction mix is pipetted into a well of a 96-well deep-well plate containing 75 μL ice-cold acetonitrile. Samples are vortexed and centrifuged 10 minutes at 3500 rpm (Sorval T 6000D centrifuge, H1000B rotor). 75 μL of supernatant from each reaction is transferred to a well of a 96-well plate containing 150 μL of a 0.5 μM solution of a compound with a known LCMS profile (internal standard) per well. LCMS analysis of each sample is carried out and the amount of unmetabolized test compound is measured as AUC, compound concentration vs. time is plotted, and the t1/2 value of the test compound is extrapolated.
  • Preferred compounds of the present invention exhibit in vitro t1/2 values of greater than 10 minutes and less than 4 hours, preferably between 30 minutes and 1 hour, in human liver microsomes.
    • Example 8 MDCK Toxicity Assay
  • This Example illustrates the evaluation of compound toxicity using a Madin Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cell cytotoxicity assay.
  • 1 μL of test compound is added to each well of a clear bottom 96-well plate (PACKARD, Meriden, Conn.) to give final concentration of compound in the assay of 10 micromolar, 100 micromolar or 200 micromolar. Solvent without test compound is added to control wells.
  • MDCK cells, ATCC no. CCL-34 (American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Va.), are maintained in sterile conditions following the instructions in the ATCC production information sheet. Confluent MDCK cells are trypsinized, harvested, and diluted to a concentration of 0.1×106 cells/ml with warm (37° C.) medium (VITACELL Minimum Essential Medium Eagle, ATCC catalog #30-2003). 100 μL of diluted cells is added to each well, except for five standard curve control wells that contain 100 μL of warm medium without cells. The plate is then incubated at 37° C. under 95% O2, 5% CO2 for 2 hours with constant shaking. After incubation, 50 μL of mammalian cell lysis solution is added per well, the wells are covered with PACKARD TOPSEAL stickers, and plates are shaken at approximately 700 rpm on a suitable shaker for 2 minutes.
  • Compounds causing toxicity will decrease ATP production, relative to untreated cells. The PACKARD, (Meriden, Conn.) ATP-LITE-M Luminescent ATP detection kit, product no. 6016941, is generally used according to the manufacturer's instructions to measure ATP production in treated and untreated MDCK cells. PACKARD ATP LITE-M reagents are allowed to equilibrate to room temperature. Once equilibrated, the lyophilized substrate solution is reconstituted in 5.5 mls of substrate buffer solution (from kit). Lyophilized ATP standard solution is reconstituted in deionized water to give a 10 mM stock. For the five control wells, 10 μL of serially diluted PACKARD standard is added to each of the standard curve control wells to yield a final concentration in each subsequent well of 200 nM, 100 nM, 50 nM, 25 nM and 12.5 nM. PACKARD substrate solution (50 μL) is added to all wells, which are then covered, and the plates are shaken at approximately 700 rpm on a suitable shaker for 2 minutes. A white PACKARD sticker is attached to the bottom of each plate and samples are dark adapted by wrapping plates in foil and placing in the dark for 10 minutes. Luminescence is then measured at 22° C. using a luminescence counter (e.g., PACKARD TOPCOUNT Microplate Scintillation and Luminescence Counter or TECAN SPECTRAFLUOR PLUS), and ATP levels calculated from the standard curve. ATP levels in cells treated with test compound(s) are compared to the levels determined for untreated cells. Cells treated with 10 μM of a preferred test compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80%, preferably at least 90%, of the untreated cells. When a 100 μM concentration of the test compound is used, cells treated with preferred test compounds exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50%, preferably at least 80%, of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
    • Example 9 Dorsal Root Ganglion Cell Assay
  • This Example illustrates a representative dorsal root ganglian cell assay for evaluating VR1 antagonist activity of a compound.
  • DRG are dissected from neonatal rats, dissociated and cultured using standard methods (Aguayo and White (1992) Brain Research 570:61-67). After 48 hour incubation, cells are washed once and incubated for 30-60 minutes with the calcium sensitive dye Fluo 4 AM (2.5-10 ug/ml; TefLabs, Austin, Tex.). Cells are then washed once, and various concentrations of compound is added to the cells. Addition of capsaicin to the cells results in a VR1-dependent increase in intracellular calcium levels which is monitored by a change in Fluo-4 fluorescence with a fluorometer. Data are collected for 60-180 seconds to determine the maximum fluorescent signal. Fluorescent signal is then plotted as a function of compound concentration to identify the concentration required to achieve a 50% inhibition of the capsaicin-activated response, or IC50. Antagonists of the capsaicin receptor preferably have an IC50 below 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar.
    • Example 10 Animal Models for Determining Pain Relief
  • This Example illustrates representative methods for assessing the degree of pain relief provided by a compound.
    • A. Pain Relief Testing
  • The following methods may be used to assess pain relief.
    • Mechanical Allodynia
  • Mechanical allodynia (an abnormal response to an innocuous stimulus) is assessed essentially as described by Chaplan et al. (1994) J. Neurosci. Methods 53:55-63 and Tal and Eliav (1998) Pain 64(3):511-518. A series of von Frey filaments of varying rigidity (typically 8-14 filaments in a series) are applied to the plantar surface of the hind paw with just enough force to bend the filament. The filaments are held in this position for no more than three seconds or until a positive allodynic response is displayed by the rat. A positive allodynic response consists of lifting the affected paw followed immediately by licking or shaking of the paw. The order and frequency with which the individual filaments are applied are determined by using Dixon up-down method. Testing is initiated with the middle hair of the series with subsequent filaments being applied in consecutive fashion, ascending or descending, depending on whether a negative or positive response, respectively, is obtained with the initial filament.
  • Compounds are effective in reversing or preventing mechanical allodynia-like symptoms if rats treated with such compounds require stimulation with a Von Frey filament of higher rigidity strength to provoke a positive allodynic response as compared to control untreated or vehicle treated rats. Alternatively, or in addition, testing of an animal in chronic pain may be done before and after compound administration. In such an assay, an effective compound results in an increase in the rigidity of the filament needed to induce a response after treatment, as compared to the filament that induces a response before treatment or in an animal that is also in chronic pain but is left untreated or is treated with vehicle. Test compounds are administered before or after onset of pain. When a test compound is administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
    • Mechanical Hyperalgesia
  • Mechanical hyperalgesia (an exaggerated response to painful stimulus) is tested essentially as described by Koch et al. (1996) Analgesia 2(3):157-164. Rats are placed in individual compartments of a cage with a warmed, perforated metal floor. Hind paw withdrawal duration (i.e., the amount of time for which the animal holds its paw up before placing it back on the floor) is measured after a mild pinprick to the plantar surface of either hind paw.
  • Compounds produce a reduction in mechanical hyperalgesia if there is a statistically significant decrease in the duration of hindpaw withdrawal. Test compound may be administered before or after onset of pain. For compounds administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
    • Thermal Hyperalgesia
  • Thermal hyperalgesia (an exaggerated response to noxious thermal stimulus) is measured essentially as described by Hargreaves et al. (1988) Pain. 32(1):77-88. Briefly, a constant radiant heat source is applied the animals' plantar surface of either hind paw. The time to withdrawal (i.e., the amount of time that heat is applied before the animal moves its paw), otherwise described as thermal threshold or latency, determines the animal's hind paw sensitivity to heat.
  • Compounds produce a reduction in thermal hyperalgesia if there is a statistically significant increase in the time to hindpaw withdrawal (i.e., the thermal threshold to response or latency is increased). Test compound may be administered before or after onset of pain. For compounds administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
    • B. Pain Models
  • Pain may be induced using any of the following methods, to allow testing of analgesic efficacy of a compound. In general, compounds provided herein result in a statistically significant reduction in pain as determined by at least one of the previously described testing methods, using male SD rats and at least one of the following models.
    • Acute Inflammatory Pain Model
  • Acute inflammatory pain is induced using the carrageenan model essentially as described by Field et al. (1997) Br. J. Pharmacol. 121(8):1513-1522. 100-200 μl of 1-2% carrageenan solution is injected into the rats' hind paw. Three to four hours following injection, the animals' sensitivity to thermal and mechanical stimuli is tested using the methods described above. A test compound (0.01 to 50 mg/kg) is administered to the animal, prior to testing, or prior to injection of carrageenan. The compound can be administered orally or through any parenteral route, or topically on the paw. Compounds that relieve pain in this model result in a statistically significant reduction in mechanical allodynia and/or thermal hyperalgesia.
    • Chronic Inflammatory Pain Model
  • Chronic inflammatory pain is induced using one of the following protocols:
      • 1. Essentially as described by Bertorelli et al. (1999) Br. J. Pharmacol. 128(6):1252-1258, and Stein et al. (1998) Pharmacol. Biochem. Behav. 31(2):455-51, 200 μL Complete Freund's Adjuvant (0.1 mg heat killed and dried M. Tuberculosis) is injected to the rats' hind paw: 100 μL into the dorsal surface and 100 μL into the plantar surface.
      • 2. Essentially as described by Abbadie et al. (1994) J. Neurosci. 14(10):5865-5871 rats are injected with 150 μL of CFA (1.5 mg) in the tibio-tarsal joint.
  • Prior to injection with CFA in either protocol, an individual baseline sensitivity to mechanical and thermal stimulation of the animals' hind paws is obtained for each experimental animal.
  • Following injection of CFA, rats are tested for thermal hyperalgesia, mechanical allodynia and mechanical hyperalgesia as described above. To verify the development of symptoms, rats are tested on days 5,6, and 7 following CFA injection. On day 7, animals are treated with a test compound, morphine or vehicle. An oral dose of morphine of 1-5 mg/kg is suitable as positive control. Typically, a dose of 0.01-50 mg/kg of test compound is used. Compounds can be administered as a single bolus prior to testing or once or twice or three times daily, for several days prior to testing. Drugs are administered orally or through any parenteral route, or applied topically to the animal.
  • Results are expressed as Percent Maximum Potential Efficacy (MPE). 0% MPE is defined as analgesic effect of vehicle, 100% MPE is defined as an animal's return to pre-CFA baseline sensitivity. Compounds that relieve pain in this model result in a MPE of at least 30%.
    • Chronic Neuropathic Pain Model
  • Chronic neuropathic pain is induced using the chronic constriction injury (CCI) to the rat's sciatic nerve essentially as described by Bennett and Xie (1988) Pain 33:87-107. Rats are anesthetized (e.g. with an intraperitoneal dose of 50-65 mg/kg pentobarbital with additional doses administered as needed). The lateral aspect of each hind limb is shaved and disinfected. Using aseptic technique, an incision is made on the lateral aspect of the hind limb at the mid thigh level. The biceps femoris is bluntly dissected and the sciatic nerve is exposed. On one hind limb of each animal, four loosely tied ligatures are made around the sciatic nerve approximately 1-2 mm apart. On the other side the sciatic nerve is not ligated and is not manipulated. The muscle is closed with continuous pattern and the skin is closed with wound clips or sutures. Rats are assessed for mechanical allodynia, mechanical hyperalgesia and thermal hyperalgesia as described above.
  • Compounds that relieve pain in this model result in a statistically significant reduction in mechanical allodynia, mechanical hyperalgesia and/or thermal hyperalgesia when administered (0.01-50 mg/kg, orally, parenterally or topically) immediately prior to testing as a single bolus, or for several days: once or twice or three times daily prior to testing.

Claims (46)

1. A compound of the formula:
Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00250
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
at least one of Y and Z is N; and the other of Y and Z is N or CR1;
R1 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkoxy or mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino;
R2 is: (i) hydrogen, halogen or cyano;
(ii) a group of the formula —Rc-M-A-Ry, wherein:
Rc is C0-C3alkyl or is joined to Ry or Rz, to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
M is a single covalent bond, O, S, SO2, C(═O), OC(═O), C(═O)O, O—C(═O)O, C(═O)N(Rz), OC(═O)N(Rz), N(Rz)C(═O), N(Rz)SO2, SO2N(Rz) or N(Rz);
A is a single covalent bond or C1-C8alkyl substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from Rb; and
Ry and Rz, if present, are:
(a) independently hydrogen, C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, C2-C8alkenyl, a 4-to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, or joined to Rc to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, wherein each non-hydrogen Ry and Rz is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb; or
(b) joined to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
such that R2 is not —NH2; or
(iii) taken together with R7 to form a fused 5- to 7-membered ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from oxo and C1-C4alkyl;
R7 is hydrogen, COOH, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl or taken together with R2 to form a fused, optionally substituted ring;
Ar1 is phenyl or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted ortho to the point of attachment with 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from groups of the formula LRa;
Ar2 is 6- to 10-membered aryl or 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from oxo and groups of the formula LRa;
L is independently selected at each occurrence from a single covalent bond, O, C(═O), OC(═O), C(═O)O, OC(═O)O, S(O)m, N(Rx), C(═O)N(Rx), N(Rx)C(═O), N(Rx)S(O)m, S(O)mN(Rx) and N[S(O)mRw]S(O)m; wherein m is independently selected at each occurrence from 0, 1 and 2; Rx is independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyl and C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; and Rw is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl;
Ra is independently selected at each occurrence from:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano and nitro; and
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)amino and (3- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C6alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently selected from Rb; and
Rb is independently chosen at each occurrence from hydroxy, halogen, amino, aminocarbonyl, cyano, nitro, oxo, COOH, C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkanoyl, C1-C8alkanoyloxy, C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C8alkyl ether, C1-C8hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, phenylC0-C8alkyl, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C8alkylsulfonyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C8alkyl.
2. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein Z is N.
3. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein Y is N.
4. A compound or salt according to claim 2, wherein Y is CH.
5. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein Y and Z are N.
6. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein Ar2 is phenyl or a 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from (a) groups of the formula LRa and (b) groups that are taken together to form a fused, 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from Rb.
7. (canceled)
8. (canceled)
9. A compound or salt according to claim 6, wherein Ar1 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy or C1-C6haloalkoxy.
10. A compound or salt according to claim 9, wherein:
Ar1 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl or C1-C4haloalkyl; and
Ar2 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl or C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl.
11. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein R2 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy or halogen; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6-aminoalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, amino, oxo, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkyl C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C6haloalkyl.
12.-16. (canceled)
17. A compound of the formula:
Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00251
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Y and Z are each independently N or CR1;
R1 is independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy and mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino;
R2 is: (i) hydrogen, halogen or cyano;
(ii) a group of the formula —Rc-M-A-RY, wherein:
Rc is C0-C3alkyl or is joined to Ry or Rz, to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
M is a single covalent bond, O, S, SO2, C(═O), OC(═O), C(═O)O, O—C(═O)O, C(═O)N(Rz), OC(═O)N(Rz), N(Rz)C(═O), N(Rz)SO2, SO2N(Rz) or N(Rz);
A is a single covalent bond or C1-C8alkyl substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from Rb; and
Ry and Rz, if present, are:
(a) independently hydrogen, C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, C2-C8alkenyl, a 4-to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, or joined to Rc to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, wherein each non-hydrogen Ry and Rz is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb; or
(b) joined to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb; or
(iii) taken together with R7 to form a fused 5- to 7-membered ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from oxo and C1-C4alkyl;
R7 is hydrogen, COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl or taken together with R2 to form a fused, optionally substituted ring;
Ar1 is phenyl or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted ortho to the point of attachment with 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from groups of the formula LRa;
Ar2 is 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from oxo and groups of the formula LRa;
L is independently selected at each occurrence from a single covalent bond, O, C(═O), OC(═O), C(═O)O, OC(═O)O, S(O)m, N(Rx), C(═O)N(Rx), N(Rx)C(═O), N(Rx)S(O)m, S(O)mN(Rx) and N[S(O)mRw]S(O)m; wherein m is independently selected at each occurrence from 0, 1 and 2; Rx is independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyl and C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; and Rw is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl;
Ra is independently selected at each occurrence from:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano and nitro; and
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)amino and (3- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C6alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently selected from Rb; and
Rb is independently chosen at each occurrence from hydroxy, halogen, amino, aminocarbonyl, cyano, nitro, oxo, COOH, C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkanoyl, C1-C8alkanoyloxy, C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C8alkyl ether, C1-C8hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, phenylC0-C8alkyl, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C8alkylsulfonyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C8alkyl.
18.-26. (canceled)
27. A compound of the formula:
Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00252
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Y and Z are each independently N or CR1;
R1 is independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy and mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino;
R2 is: (i) halogen or cyano;
(ii) a group of the formula —Rc-M-A-Ry, wherein:
Rc is C0-C3alkyl or is joined to Ry or Rz, to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
M is a single covalent bond, O, S, SO2, C(═O), OC(═O), C(═O)O, O—C(═O)O, C(═O)N(Rz), OC(═O)N(Rz), N(Rz)C(═O), N(Rz)SO2, SO2N(Rz) or N(Rz);
A is a single covalent bond or C1-C8alkyl substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from Rb; and
Ry and Rz, if present, are:
(a) independently hydrogen, C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, C2-C8alkenyl, a 4-to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, or joined to Rc to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, wherein each non-hydrogen Ry and Rz is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb; or
(b) joined to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from Rb;
 such that R2 is not —NH2; or
(iii) taken together with R7 to form a fused 5- to 7-membered ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from oxo and C1-C4alkyl;
R7 is hydrogen, COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl or taken together with R2 to form a fused, optionally substituted ring;
Ar1 is phenyl or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted ortho to the point of attachment with 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from groups of the formula LRa;
Ar2 is 6- to 10-membered aryl or 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from oxo and groups of the formula LRa;
L is independently selected at each occurrence from a single covalent bond, O, C(═O), OC(═O), C(═O)O, OC(═O)O, S(O)m, N(Rx), C(═O)N(Rx), N(Rx)C(═O), N(Rx)S(O)m, S(O)mN(Rx) and N[S(O)mRw]S(O)m; wherein m is independently selected at each occurrence from 0, 1 and 2; Rx is independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyl and C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; and Rw is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl;
Ra is independently selected at each occurrence from:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano and nitro; and
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)amino and (3- to 10-membered heterocycle)C0-C6alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently selected from Rb; and
Rb is independently chosen at each occurrence from hydroxy, halogen, amino, aminocarbonyl, cyano, nitro, oxo, COOH, C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkanoyl, C1-C8alkanoyloxy, C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C8alkyl ether, C1-C8hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8haloalkyl, phenylC0-C8alkyl, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C8alkylsulfonyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C8alkyl.
28. A compound or salt according to claim 27, wherein at least one of Y and Z is N.
29. A compound or salt according to claim 27, wherein Y and Z are both CH.
30. A compound or salt according to claim 27, wherein Ar2 is phenyl or a 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from (a) groups of the formula LRa and (b) groups that are taken together to form a fused, 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from Rb.
31. (canceled)
32. (canceled)
33. A compound or salt according to claim 27, wherein Ar1 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy or C1-C6haloalkoxy.
34.-46. (canceled)
47. A compound or salt according to claim 27, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20090286767A1-20091119-C00253
wherein:
Ar1 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy or C1-C6haloalkoxy;
Ar2 is phenyl or a 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from (a) groups of the formula LRa and (b) groups that are taken together to form a fused, 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently selected from Rb;
R3 is selected from:
(i) hydrogen; and
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C6-C10arylC0-C8alkyl, and 5- to 10-membered heterocycleC0-C8alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently selected from Rb;
R5 and R6 are, independently at each occurrence:
(i) each independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy and C1-C6alkyl; or
(ii) taken together to form a keto group; and
n is 1, 2 or 3.
48. A compound or salt according to claim 47, wherein Ar2 is phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl or pyridazinyl, each of which is substituted with 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from halogen, cyano, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6hydroxyalkyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C1-C6haloalkylsulfonyl, amino, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino.
49.-59. (canceled)
60. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising at least one compound or salt according to claim 1 in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
61. A method for reducing calcium conductance of a cellular capsaicin receptor, comprising contacting a cell expressing a capsaicin receptor with at least one compound or salt according to claim 1, and thereby reducing calcium conductance of the capsaicin receptor.
62.-70. (canceled)
71. A method for inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to a capsaicin receptor in vitro, the method comprising contacting capsaicin receptor with at least one compound or salt according to claim 1, in an amount sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to capsaicin receptor.
72. A method for inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to a capsaicin receptor in a patient, the method comprising contacting cells expressing capsaicin receptor with at least one compound or salt according to claim 1, in an amount sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to cells expressing a cloned capsaicin receptor in vitro, and thereby inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to the capsaicin receptor in the patient.
73. (canceled)
74. A method for treating a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of a compound or salt according to claim 1, and thereby alleviating the condition in the patient.
75. (canceled)
76. (canceled)
77. A method for treating pain in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from pain a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of at least one compound or salt according to claim 1, and thereby alleviating pain in the patient.
78.-80. (canceled)
81. A method according to claim 77, wherein the patient is suffering from neuropathic pain.
82. A method according to claim 77, wherein the patient is afflicted with a condition selected from: postmastectomy pain syndrome, stump pain, phantom limb pain, oral neuropathic pain, toothache, postherpetic neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, fibromyalgia, Guillain-Barre syndrome, meralgia paresthetica, burning-mouth syndrome, bilateral peripheral neuropathy, causalgia, neuritis, neuronitis, neuralgia, AIDS-related neuropathy, MS-related neuropathy, spinal cord injury-related pain, surgery-related pain, musculoskeletal pain, back pain, headache, migraine, angina, labor, hemorrhoids, dyspepsia, Charcot's pains, intestinal gas, menstruation, cancer, venom exposure, irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease and trauma.
83. (canceled)
84. A method for treating a condition selected from the group consisting of itch, cough, hiccup, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder in a patient, comprising administering to a patient a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of a compound or salt according to claim 1, and thereby alleviating the condition in the patient.
85. (canceled)
86. (canceled)
87. A method promoting weight loss in an obese patient, comprising administering to a patient a capsaicin receptor modulatory amount of a compound or salt according to claim 1, and thereby promoting weight loss in the patient.
88.-91. (canceled)
92. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising:
(a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 60 in a container; and
(b) instructions for using the composition to treat pain.
93.-97. (canceled)
US12/368,302 2003-07-14 2009-02-09 Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues Abandoned US20090286767A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/368,302 US20090286767A1 (en) 2003-07-14 2009-02-09 Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US48694803P 2003-07-14 2003-07-14
US10/891,832 US7488740B2 (en) 2003-07-14 2004-07-14 Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US12/368,302 US20090286767A1 (en) 2003-07-14 2009-02-09 Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/891,832 Continuation US7488740B2 (en) 2003-07-14 2004-07-14 Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20090286767A1 true US20090286767A1 (en) 2009-11-19

Family

ID=34079320

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/891,832 Expired - Fee Related US7488740B2 (en) 2003-07-14 2004-07-14 Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US12/368,302 Abandoned US20090286767A1 (en) 2003-07-14 2009-02-09 Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/891,832 Expired - Fee Related US7488740B2 (en) 2003-07-14 2004-07-14 Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (2) US7488740B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1644372A2 (en)
JP (2) JP2007535478A (en)
CN (1) CN1820008A (en)
AU (1) AU2004257296A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2531535A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200510373A (en)
WO (1) WO2005007652A2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060111337A1 (en) * 2004-10-12 2006-05-25 Neurogen Corporation Substituted biaryl quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US10030004B2 (en) 2014-01-01 2018-07-24 Medivation Technologies Llc Compounds and methods of use

Families Citing this family (24)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW200418480A (en) * 2002-12-13 2004-10-01 Neurogen Corp 2-substituted quinazolin-4-ylamine analogues
CA2509616A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2004-07-01 Neurogen Corporation Combination therapy for the treatment of pain
TW200510373A (en) * 2003-07-14 2005-03-16 Neurogen Corp Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
CA2537883A1 (en) * 2003-09-09 2005-03-17 Neurogen Corporation Substituted bicyclic quinazolin-4-ylamine derivatives
AU2005221614A1 (en) * 2004-03-04 2005-09-22 Neurogen Corporation Arylalkylamino-substituted quinazoline analogues
WO2005099710A1 (en) * 2004-04-08 2005-10-27 Neurogen Corporation Substituted cinnolin-4-ylamines
CA2624307C (en) 2005-10-07 2014-04-29 Glenmark Pharmaceuticals S.A. Substituted benzofused derivatives and their use as vanilloid receptor ligands
US7910595B2 (en) 2005-12-21 2011-03-22 Abbott Laboratories Anti-viral compounds
WO2007081517A2 (en) 2005-12-21 2007-07-19 Abbott Laboratories Anti-viral compounds
ATE475660T1 (en) 2005-12-21 2010-08-15 Abbott Lab ANTIVIRAL COMPOUNDS
EP2591675A1 (en) 2006-11-27 2013-05-15 H. Lundbeck A/S Heteroaryl amide derivatives
EP2094276A4 (en) 2006-12-20 2011-01-05 Abbott Lab Anti-viral compounds
EP2116618A1 (en) 2008-05-09 2009-11-11 Agency for Science, Technology And Research Diagnosis and treatment of Kawasaki disease
US8546388B2 (en) * 2008-10-24 2013-10-01 Purdue Pharma L.P. Heterocyclic TRPV1 receptor ligands
US8703962B2 (en) * 2008-10-24 2014-04-22 Purdue Pharma L.P. Monocyclic compounds and their use as TRPV1 ligands
US8759362B2 (en) * 2008-10-24 2014-06-24 Purdue Pharma L.P. Bicycloheteroaryl compounds and their use as TRPV1 ligands
AU2010303822A1 (en) 2009-10-07 2012-03-15 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Novel TRPA1 antagonists
US9051318B2 (en) 2011-03-09 2015-06-09 Merck Patent Gmbh Pyrido [2, 3-B] pyrazine compounds and their therapeutical uses such as for inhibiting ATP consuming proteins and treating diseases associated therewith
EP2861588A4 (en) * 2012-06-15 2016-04-20 Univ California NEW THERAPEUTIC AGENTS FOR BRAIN CANCER
US10227333B2 (en) 2015-02-11 2019-03-12 Curtana Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Inhibition of OLIG2 activity
CN107530304A (en) 2015-02-27 2018-01-02 科泰纳制药公司 The suppression of OLIG2 activity
WO2017031427A1 (en) * 2015-08-19 2017-02-23 3-V Biosciences, Inc. COMPOUNDS AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING mTOR
EP3929185A4 (en) * 2019-02-19 2023-02-15 Sichuan Kelun-Biotech Biopharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Nitrogen-containing fused cyclic compound, preparation method therefor and use thereof
DE102022104759A1 (en) 2022-02-28 2023-08-31 SCi Kontor GmbH Co-crystal screening method, in particular for the production of co-crystals

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6169091B1 (en) * 1995-10-11 2001-01-02 Glaxo Wellcome Inc. Bicyclic heteroaromatic compounds as protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors
US20040106616A1 (en) * 2002-01-17 2004-06-03 Rajagopal Bakthavatchalam Substituted quinazolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20040156869A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2004-08-12 Neurogen Corporation 2-substituted quinazolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20060111337A1 (en) * 2004-10-12 2006-05-25 Neurogen Corporation Substituted biaryl quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20080175794A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-07-24 Neurogen Corporation Substituted Pyridazinyl- and Pyrimidinyl-Quinolin-4-Ylamine Analogues
US7488740B2 (en) * 2003-07-14 2009-02-10 Neurogen Corporation Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues

Family Cites Families (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB8928281D0 (en) 1989-12-14 1990-02-21 Smith Kline French Lab Compounds
GB9510757D0 (en) 1994-09-19 1995-07-19 Wellcome Found Therapeuticaly active compounds
GB9603097D0 (en) 1996-02-14 1996-04-10 Zeneca Ltd Quinazoline compounds
ES2191187T3 (en) 1996-07-13 2003-09-01 Glaxo Group Ltd BICYCLE HETEROAROMATIC COMPOUNDS AS INHIBITORS OF PROTEIN TIROSIN-QUINASA.
EP0912559B1 (en) 1996-07-13 2002-11-06 Glaxo Group Limited Fused heterocyclic compounds as protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors
HRP970371A2 (en) 1996-07-13 1998-08-31 Kathryn Jane Smith Heterocyclic compounds
US5863016A (en) 1997-02-28 1999-01-26 The Wiremold Company Modular faceplate assembly having concealed latching means
MA26473A1 (en) * 1997-03-01 2004-12-20 Glaxo Group Ltd PHARMACOLOGICALLY ACTIVE COMPOUNDS.
RS49779B (en) 1998-01-12 2008-06-05 Glaxo Group Limited, BICYCLIC HETEROAROMATIC COMPOUNDS AS PROTEIN TYROSINE KINASE INHIBITORS
HU230728B1 (en) 1998-09-29 2017-12-28 Wyeth Holdings Llc Substituted 3-cyanoquinolines as protein tyrosine kinases inhibitors
GB2345486A (en) * 1999-01-11 2000-07-12 Glaxo Group Ltd Heteroaromatic protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors
US6521618B2 (en) 2000-03-28 2003-02-18 Wyeth 3-cyanoquinolines, 3-cyano-1,6-naphthyridines, and 3-cyano-1,7-naphthyridines as protein kinase inhibitors
BR0112631A (en) 2000-07-20 2003-09-23 Neurogen Corp A compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, pharmaceutical composition, package, methods of reducing the calcium conductance of a capsaicin receptor and treating a mammal and use of a compound.
ES2242771T5 (en) 2000-09-15 2011-10-14 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated PIRAZOL COMPOUNDS USEFUL AS PROTEIN QUINASE INHIBITORS.
US20040259875A1 (en) * 2001-07-31 2004-12-23 Takeshi Yura Amine derivatives
WO2004005472A2 (en) * 2002-07-02 2004-01-15 Southern Research Institute Inhibitors of ftsz and uses thereof
CA2509616A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2004-07-01 Neurogen Corporation Combination therapy for the treatment of pain

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6169091B1 (en) * 1995-10-11 2001-01-02 Glaxo Wellcome Inc. Bicyclic heteroaromatic compounds as protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors
US20040106616A1 (en) * 2002-01-17 2004-06-03 Rajagopal Bakthavatchalam Substituted quinazolin-4-ylamine analogues
US7304059B2 (en) * 2002-01-17 2007-12-04 Neurogen Corporation Substituted quinazolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20080015183A1 (en) * 2002-01-17 2008-01-17 Neurogen Corporation Substituted quinazolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20040156869A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2004-08-12 Neurogen Corporation 2-substituted quinazolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20060089354A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2006-04-27 Rajagopal Bakthavatchalam Carboxylic acid, phosphate or phosphonate substituted quinazolin-4-ylamine analogues as capsaicin receptor modulators
US7488740B2 (en) * 2003-07-14 2009-02-10 Neurogen Corporation Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20060111337A1 (en) * 2004-10-12 2006-05-25 Neurogen Corporation Substituted biaryl quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20080175794A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-07-24 Neurogen Corporation Substituted Pyridazinyl- and Pyrimidinyl-Quinolin-4-Ylamine Analogues

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060111337A1 (en) * 2004-10-12 2006-05-25 Neurogen Corporation Substituted biaryl quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US7935702B2 (en) 2004-10-12 2011-05-03 Neurogen Corporation Substituted biaryl quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US10030004B2 (en) 2014-01-01 2018-07-24 Medivation Technologies Llc Compounds and methods of use
US10501436B2 (en) 2014-01-01 2019-12-10 Medivation Technologies Llc Compounds and methods of use
US11053216B2 (en) 2014-01-01 2021-07-06 Medivation Technologies Llc Compounds and methods of use
US11702401B2 (en) 2014-01-01 2023-07-18 Medivation Technologies Llc Compounds and methods of use

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2011137018A (en) 2011-07-14
CN1820008A (en) 2006-08-16
WO2005007652A2 (en) 2005-01-27
TW200510373A (en) 2005-03-16
CA2531535A1 (en) 2005-01-27
AU2004257296A1 (en) 2005-01-27
JP2007535478A (en) 2007-12-06
US7488740B2 (en) 2009-02-10
EP1644372A2 (en) 2006-04-12
US20050070547A1 (en) 2005-03-31
WO2005007652A3 (en) 2005-03-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20090286767A1 (en) Substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US7432275B2 (en) Carboxylic acid, phosphate or phosphonate substituted quinazolin-4-ylamine analogues as capsaicin receptor modulators
US20070105865A1 (en) Substituted bicyclic quinazolin-4-ylamine derivatives
US20060194805A1 (en) Capsaicin receptor agonists
US20080085901A1 (en) Heteroaryl Substituted Quinolin-4-Ylamine Analogues
US7329664B2 (en) Substituted (7-pyridyl-4-phenylamino-quinazolin-2-yl)-methanol analogues
US20080175794A1 (en) Substituted Pyridazinyl- and Pyrimidinyl-Quinolin-4-Ylamine Analogues
US20070191374A1 (en) Substituted cinnolin-4-ylamines
US7935702B2 (en) Substituted biaryl quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20070219203A1 (en) Arylalkylamino-substituted quinazoline analogues
US20080045525A1 (en) Piperazinyl-Pyridine Analogues
US20070203133A1 (en) Substituted 5,12-diaza-benzoanthracene analogues
US20080125466A1 (en) Aryl-Substituted Benzo[D]Isothiazol-3-Ylamine Analogues

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION